professional digital two-way radio mototrbo™ … · programmable manual dial button.....192...

290
PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ DP4800/DP4801 COLOUR DISPLAY PORTABLE USER GUIDE

Upload: others

Post on 13-Mar-2020

4 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO

MOTOTRBO™ DP4800/DP4801COLOUR DISPLAY PORTABLEUSER GUIDE

Page 2: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Contents

Important Safety Information........14

Software Version............................15

Computer Software Copyrights....16

Handling Precautions....................17

Getting Started...............................18How to Use This Guide..................................18What Your Dealer/System Administrator

Can Tell You.............................................18

Preparing Your Radio for Use.......20

Charging the Battery......................................20Attaching the Battery..................................... 20Attaching the Antenna................................... 21Attaching the Belt Clip................................... 21Attaching the Universal Connector Cover

(Dust Cover)............................................. 22Powering Up the Radio..................................22Adjusting the Volume.....................................23

Identifying Radio Controls............24Radio Controls...............................................24Using the 4–Way Navigation Button..............25Using the Keypad.......................................... 26

Non-Connect Plus Operations......28

Additional Radio Controlsin Non-Connect PlusMode.................................... 29

Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button.................29Programmable Buttons....................... 29

Assignable Radio Functions.....30

Contents

1

English

Page 3: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Assignable Settings or UtilityFunctions............................ 32

Accessing the ProgrammedFunctions....................................... 33

Identifying Status Indicators................33Display Icons............................33Call Icons................................. 36Advanced Menu Icons..............37Mini Notice Icons......................37Sent Item Icons ....................37Bluetooth Device Icons............ 38Job Tickets Icons..................... 38LED Indicator........................... 38Audio Tones.............................40Indicator Tones........................ 40

Switching Between ConventionalAnalog and Digital Mode................41

IP Site Connect ...............................41Capacity Plus ..................................42Linked Capacity Plus ...................... 42

Making and Receiving Callsin Non-Connect PlusMode.................................... 44

Selecting a Zone.................................44Selecting a Channel............................45Receiving and Responding to a

Radio Call...................................... 45Receiving and Responding

to a Group Call....................46Receiving and Responding

to a Private Call .............. 46Receiving an All Call ............... 47Receiving and Responding

to a Selective Call ........... 48Receiving and Responding

to a Phone Call ............... 48Making a Radio Call............................50

Making a Group Call................ 50Making a Private Call ...........51Making an All Call ................... 52Making a Selective Call ....... 53Making a Phone Call with

the One Touch AccessButton..................................54

Making a Private Call with aOne Touch Call Button........55

Making a Group, Private orAll Call with the

Con

tent

s

2

English

Page 4: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Programmable NumberKey ..................................56

Making a Phone Call withthe ProgrammablePhone Button .................. 57

Making a Call with theProgrammable ManualDial Button ...................... 59

Stopping a Radio Call .....................61Talkaround..........................................62Monitoring Features............................63

Monitoring a Channel...............63Permanent Monitor...................63

Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode............ 64

Radio Check....................................... 64Sending a Radio Check........... 64

Remote Monitor.................................. 66Initiating Remote Monitor......... 66Stopping Remote Monitor........ 67

Scan Lists........................................... 68Viewing an Entry in the

Scan List............................. 68

Viewing an Entry in theScan List by Alias Search... 69

Editing the Scan List................ 69Scan....................................................73

Starting and Stopping Scan..... 74Responding to a

Transmission During aScan....................................74

Deleting a Nuisance Channel...75Restoring a Nuisance

Channel...............................75Vote Scan ....................................... 75Contact Settings..................................76

Making a Group Call fromContacts..............................76

Making a Private Call fromContacts ..........................77

Making a Phone Call fromContacts..............................78

Making a Call Alias Search.........................................81

Making a Group, Private,Phone or All Call by AliasSearch ................................82

Contents

3

English

Page 5: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Assigning an Entry to aProgrammable NumberKey ..................................83

Removing the Associationbetween Entry andProgrammable NumberKey ..................................84

Adding a New Contact............. 85Setting a Default Contact .....86

Call Indicator Settings.........................86Activating and Deactivating

Call Ringers for Call Alert.........................................86

Activating and DeactivatingCall Ringers for PrivateCalls ................................87

Activating and DeactivatingCall Ringers for SelectiveCall ..................................88

Activating and DeactivatingCall Ringers for TextMessage............................. 88

Activating and DeactivatingCall Ringers forTelemetry Status withText..................................... 89

Assigning Ring Styles.............. 90Escalating Alarm Tone

Volume................................90Call Log Features................................90

Viewing Recent Calls............... 90Storing an Alias from a Call

List...................................... 91Deleting a Call from a Call

List...................................... 91Viewing Details from a Call

List...................................... 92Call Alert Operation.............................92

Receiving and Respondingto a Call Alert...................... 92

Making a Call Alert from theContact List......................... 93

Making a Call Alert with theOne Touch AccessButton..................................94

Emergency Operation.........................94Receiving an Emergency

Alarm...................................95Responding to an

Emergency Alarm............... 95Sending an Emergency

Alarm...................................96

Con

tent

s

4

English

Page 6: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Sending an EmergencyAlarm with Call.................... 97

Sending an EmergencyAlarm with Voice toFollow ............................. 98

Reinitiating an EmergencyMode................................... 99

Exiting Emergency ModeAfter Sending theEmergency Alarm............... 99

Analog Message Encode ..............100Sending MDC Message

Encode to Dispatcher........100Sending 5–Tone Message

Encode to Contact............ 100Analog Status Update ...................101

Sending Status Update toPredefined Contact........... 101

Viewing a 5-Tone StatusDetails............................... 101

Editing 5–Tone StatusDetails............................... 102

Text Message Features ................... 102Writing and Sending a Text

Message........................... 103

Sending a Quick TextMessage with the OneTouch Access Button........ 104

Accessing the Drafts Folder...104Managing Fail-to-Send Text

Messages..........................106Managing Sent Text

Messages..........................108Receiving a Text Message.....112Managing Received Text

Messages..........................112Job Tickets........................................116

Accessing the Job TicketFolder................................116

Logging In and Out of theRemote Server..................117

Creating and Sending a JobTicket................................ 118

Responding to the Job Ticket.119Deleting a Job Ticket..............119

Privacy ..........................................120Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF). 122Multi-Site Controls ........................ 122

Starting an Automatic SiteSearch...............................122

Contents

5

English

Page 7: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Stopping an Automatic SiteSearch...............................123

Starting a Manual SiteSearch...............................124

Security.............................................125Radio Disable.........................125Radio Enable..........................126

Lone Worker..................................... 128Password Lock Features.................. 128

Accessing the Radio fromPassword.......................... 128

Unlocking the Radio fromLocked State..................... 129

Turning the Password LockOn or Off........................... 130

Changing the Password.........130Bluetooth Operation..........................131

Turning Bluetooth On andOff..................................... 132

Finding and Connecting to aBluetooth Device...............132

Finding and Connectingfrom a Bluetooth Device(Discoverable Mode).........133

Disconnecting from aBluetooth Device...............134

Switching Audio Routebetween Internal RadioSpeaker and BluetoothDevice............................... 134

Viewing Device Details...........135Editing Device Name..............135Deleting Device Name........... 135Bluetooth Mic Gain.................136Permanent Bluetooth

Discoverable Mode........... 136Notification List..................................137

Accessing the NotificationList.................................... 137

Auto-Range Transponder System(ARTS) .....................................137

Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP).. 138Utilities.............................................. 138

Locking and Unlocking theKeypad..............................138

Turning Keypad Tones Onor Off................................. 139

Setting the Squelch Level...... 139Setting the Power Level......... 140Turning the Option Board

Feature(s) On or Off..........141Identifying Cable Type........... 141

Con

tent

s

6

English

Page 8: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Turning the Voice OperatingTransmission (VOX)Feature On or Off..............141

Setting the Display BacklightTimer.................................142

Turning the Backlight AutoOn or Off........................... 143

Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off................. 143

Setting the Tone AlertVolume Offset Level..........144

Turning the Talk PermitTone On or Off.................. 145

Turning the Power Up AlertTone On or Off.................. 145

Setting the Text MessageAlert Tone......................... 146

Changing the Display Mode...147Adjusting the Display

Brightness......................... 147Language............................... 148Turning the LED Indicator

On or Off........................... 149Turning the Introduction

Screen On or Off...............149Turning the Voice

Announcement On or Off.. 150

Setting the Text-to-SpeechFeature..............................151

Call Forwarding ..................152Menu Timer............................153Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-

A)...................................... 153Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-

D)...................................... 154Switching Audio Route

between Internal RadioSpeaker and WiredAccessory......................... 154

Intelligent Audio......................155Turning the Acoustic

Feedback SuppressorFeature On or Off ..........156

Turning the MicrophoneDynamic DistortionControl Feature On or Off. 157

Turning Trill EnhancementOn or Off........................... 158

Setting the Audio Ambience...158Setting the Audio Profiles.......159Turning the Global

Positioning System(GPS) On or Off................ 159

Contents

7

English

Page 9: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Text Entry Configuration........ 160Flexible Receive List.............. 165Accessing General Radio

Information........................ 168Front Panel Programming

(FPP).................................172Checking the RSSI Values.....172

Connect Plus Operations............173

Additional Radio Controlsin Connect Plus Mode...... 174

Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button...............174Programmable Buttons..................... 174

Assignable Radio Functions...174Assignable Settings or Utility

Functions.......................... 176Identifying Status Indicators in

Connect Plus Mode..................... 177Display Icons..........................177Call Icons............................... 178Advanced Menu Icons............179Sent Item Icons ..................... 179Bluetooth Device Icons.......... 180

LED Indicator......................... 180Indicator Tones...................... 181Audio Tones...........................181

Switching Between Connect Plusand Non-Connect Plus Modes.....182

Making and Receiving Callsin Connect Plus Mode...... 183

Selecting a Site.................................183Roam Request....................... 183Site Lock On/Off.....................183Site Restriction.......................183

Selecting a Zone...............................184Using Multiple Networks................... 184Selecting a Call Type........................185Receiving and Responding to a

Radio Call.................................... 185Receiving and Responding

to a Group Call..................186Receiving and Responding

to a Private Call.................186Receiving a Site All Call.........187Receiving an Inbound

Private Phone Call............ 187

Con

tent

s

8

English

Page 10: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Receiving an InboundPhone Talkgroup Call....... 188

Inbound Phone Multi-GroupCall....................................189

Making a Radio Call..........................189Making a Call with the

Channel Selector Knob..... 189Making a Private Call with a

One Touch Call Button......192Making a Call with the

Programmable ManualDial Button........................ 192

Making an Outbound PrivatePhone Call with theProgrammable ManualDial Button........................ 193

Making an Outbound PrivatePhone Call via the PhoneMenu................................. 193

Making an Outbound PrivatePhone Call from Contacts. 194

Waiting for the ChannelGrant in an OutboundPrivate Phone Call............ 195

Making a Buffered Over-Dialin a Connected

Outbound Private PhoneCall....................................196

Making a Live Over-Dial in aConnected OutboundPrivate Phone Call............ 196

Advanced Features inConnect Plus Mode.......... 198

Auto Fallback.................................... 198Indications of Auto Fallback

Mode................................. 198Making/Receiving Calls in

Fallback Mode...................198Returning to Normal

Operation.......................... 199Radio Check..................................... 199

Sending a Radio Check......... 199Remote Monitor................................ 200

Initiating Remote Monitor....... 201Scan..................................................202

Starting and Stopping Scan... 202Responding to a

Transmission During aScan..................................202

User Configurable Scan....................203

Contents

9

English

Page 11: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Turning Scan On or Off.....................203Editing the Scan List......................... 204Add or Delete a Group via the Add

Members Menu............................205Understanding Scan Operation.........207Scan Talkback.................................. 207Contacts Settings..............................208

Making a Private Call fromContacts............................209

Making a Call Alias Search.... 210Adding a New Contact........... 210

Call Indicator Settings.......................211Activating and Deactivating

Call Ringers for Call Alert .211Activating and Deactivating

Call Ringers for PrivateCalls.................................. 211

Activating and DeactivatingCall Ringers for TextMessage........................... 212

Escalating Alarm ToneVolume..............................212

Call Log Features..............................213Viewing Recent Calls............. 213Deleting a Call from a Call

List.................................... 213

Viewing Details from a CallList.................................... 214

Call Alert Operation...........................214Receiving and Responding

to a Call Alert.................... 214Making a Call Alert from the

Contact List....................... 215Making a Call Alert with the

One Touch AccessButton................................216

Emergency Operation.......................216Receiving an Incoming

Emergency........................217Saving the Emergency

Details to the Alarm List.... 218Deleting the Emergency

Details............................... 218Responding to an

Emergency Call.................219Responding to an

Emergency Alert............... 219Initiating an Emergency Call.. 220Initiating an Emergency Call

with Voice to Follow.......... 220Initiating an Emergency Alert. 221Exiting Emergency Mode....... 221

Man Down Alarms.............................222

Con

tent

s

10

English

Page 12: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Turning Man Down AlarmsOn and Off........................ 223

Resetting the Man DownAlarms...............................224

Beacon Feature................................ 225Turning Beacon On and Off... 225Resetting the Beacon.............226

Text Message Features.................... 227Writing and Sending a Text

Message........................... 227Sending a Quick Text

Message........................... 228Sending a Quick Text

Message with the OneTouch Access Button........ 229

Accessing the Drafts Folder...229Managing Fail-to-Send Text

Messages..........................231Managing Sent Text

Messages..........................233Receiving a Text Message.....237Reading a Text Message....... 237Managing Received Text

Messages..........................237Privacy.............................................. 240

Making a Privacy-Enabled(Scrambled) Call............... 242

Security.............................................242Radio Disable.........................242Radio Enable..........................243

Password Lock Features.................. 245Accessing the Radio from

Password.......................... 245Turning the Password Lock

On or Off........................... 246Unlocking the Radio from

Locked State..................... 246Changing the Password.........246

Bluetooth Operation..........................247Turning Bluetooth On and

Off..................................... 248Finding and Connecting to a

Bluetooth Device...............249Finding and Connecting

from a Bluetooth Device(Discoverable Mode).........250

Disconnecting from aBluetooth Device...............250

Switching Audio Routebetween Internal RadioSpeaker and BluetoothDevice............................... 251

Viewing Device Details...........251Editing Device Name..............251

Contents

11

English

Page 13: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Deleting Device Name........... 252Bluetooth Mic Gain.................252Permanent Bluetooth

Discoverable Mode........... 253Notification List..................................253

Accessing the NotificationList.................................... 253

Utilities.............................................. 253Turning the Radio Tones/

Alerts On or Off................. 253Turning Keypad Tones On

or Off................................. 254Setting the Tone Alert

Volume Offset Level..........255Turning the Talk Permit

Tone On or Off.................. 255Turning the Power Up Alert

Tone On or Off.................. 256Setting the Power Level......... 256Changing the Display Mode...257Adjusting the Display

Brightness......................... 258Setting the Display Backlight

Timer.................................258Turning the Introduction

Screen On or Off...............259

Locking and Unlocking theKeypad..............................259

Language............................... 260Turning the LED Indicator

On or Off........................... 261Identifying Cable Type........... 261Voice Announcement.............261Menu Timer............................262Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-

D)...................................... 263Intelligent Audio......................263Turning the Acoustic

Feedback SuppressorFeature On or Off..............264

Turning the MicrophoneDynamic DistortionControl Feature On or Off. 265

Turning the GlobalPositioning System(GPS) On or Off................ 266

Text Entry Configuration........ 266Accessing General Radio

Information........................ 272Batteries and Chargers Warranty......... 283

The Workmanship Warranty........................283The Capacity Warranty................................283

Con

tent

s

12

English

Page 14: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Limited Warranty....................................284MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION

PRODUCTS........................................... 284I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS

AND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 284II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:....................... 285III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................285IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.285V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT

COVER:..................................................286VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE

PROVISIONS:........................................ 286VII. GOVERNING LAW:...............................288

Contents

13

English

Page 15: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Important Safety InformationRF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guidefor Portable Two-Way Radios

ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only.Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposureand Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-WayRadios which contains important operatinginstructions for safe usage and RF energy awarenessand control for Compliance with applicable standardsand Regulations.

For a list of Motorola-approved antennas, batteries,and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com

Impo

rtant

Saf

ety

Info

rmat

ion

14

English

Page 16: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Software VersionAll the features described in the following sections aresupported by the radio's software version R02.40.00or later.

See Checking the Firmware Version and CodeplugVersion on page 170 to determine your radio'ssoftware version.

Check with your dealer or system administrator formore details of all the features supported.

Softw

are Version

15

English

Page 17: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Computer Software CopyrightsThe Motorola products described in this manual mayinclude copyrighted Motorola computer programsstored in semiconductor memories or other media.Laws in the United States and other countriespreserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights forcopyrighted computer programs including, but notlimited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce inany form the copyrighted computer program.Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computerprograms contained in the Motorola productsdescribed in this manual may not be copied,reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, ordistributed in any manner without the express writtenpermission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase ofMotorola products shall not be deemed to grant eitherdirectly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, anylicense under the copyrights, patents or patentapplications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation oflaw in the sale of a product.

The AMBE+2™ voice coding Technology embodied inthis product is protected by intellectual property rights

including patent rights, copyrights and trade secretsof Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

This voice coding Technology is licensed solely foruse within this Communications Equipment. The userof this Technology is explicitly prohibited fromattempting to decompile, reverse engineer, ordisassemble the Object Code, or in any other wayconvert the Object Code into a human-readable form.

U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,#5,226,084 and #5,195,166.

Com

pute

r Sof

twar

e C

opyr

ight

s

16

English

Page 18: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Handling PrecautionsThe MOTOTRBO Series Digital Portable radio meetsIP57 specifications, allowing the radio to withstandadverse field conditions such as being submersed inwater.

• If the radio has been submersed in water, shakethe radio well to remove any water that may betrapped inside the speaker grille and microphoneport. Trapped water could cause decreased audioperformance.

• If the radio’s battery contact area has beenexposed to water, clean and dry battery contactson both the radio and the battery before attachingthe battery to the radio. The residual water couldshort-circuit the radio.

• If the radio has been submersed in a corrosivesubstance (e.g. saltwater), rinse the radio andbattery in fresh water then dry the radio andbattery.

• To clean the exterior surfaces of the radio, use adiluted solution of mild dishwashing detergent andfresh water (i.e. one teaspoon of detergent to onegallon of water).

• Never poke the vent (hole) located on the radiochassis below the battery contact. This vent allowsfor pressure equalization in the radio. Doing somay create a leak path into the radio and theradio’s submersibility may be lost.

• Never obstruct or cover the vent, even with alabel.

• Ensure that no oily substances come in contactwith the vent.

• The radio with antenna attached properly isdesigned to be submersible to a maximum depthof 1 meter (3.28 feet) and a maximum submersiontime of 30 minutes. Exceeding either maximumlimit or use without antenna may result in damageto the radio.

• When cleaning the radio, do not use a highpressure jet spray on the radio as this will exceedthe 1 meter depth pressure and may cause waterto leak into the radio.

Caution: Do not disassemble the radio. Thiscould damage radio seals and result in leakpaths into the radio. Radio maintenanceshould only be done in service depot that isequipped to test and replace the seal on theradio.

Handling P

recautions

17

English

Page 19: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Getting Started

How to Use This GuideThis User Guide covers the basic operation of theMOTOTRBO Portables.

However, your dealer or system administrator mayhave customized your radio for your specific needs.Check with your dealer or system administrator formore information.

Throughout this publication, the icons described nextare used to indicate features supported in either theconventional Analog mode or conventional Digitalmode:

Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-Only feature.

Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-Only feature.

For features that are available in both conventionalAnalog and Digital modes, no icon is shown.

Conventional Analog Mode-Only features are notavailable in Connect Plus mode of operation. See Connect Plus Operations on page 173 for moreinformation.

For features that are available in a conventional multi-site mode, see IP Site Connect on page 41 for moreinformation.

Selected features are also available on the single-sitetrunking mode, Capacity Plus. See Capacity Plus onpage 42 for more information.

Selected features are also available in the multi-sitetrunking mode, Linked Capacity Plus. See LinkedCapacity Plus on page 42 for more information.

What Your Dealer/System Administrator CanTell You

You can consult your dealer or system administratorabout the following:

• Is your radio programmed with any presetconventional channels?

• Which buttons have been programmed to accessother features?

• What optional accessories may suit your needs?

Get

ting

Sta

rted

18

English

Page 20: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• What are the best radio usage practices foreffective communication?

• What maintenance procedures will help promotelonger radio life?

Getting S

tarted

19

English

Page 21: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Preparing Your Radio for Use

Charging the Battery

For best performance, your radio is powered by aMotorola-approved Nickel Metal-Hydride (NiMH) orLithium-Ion (Li-lon) battery. To avoid damage and toensure compliance with warranty terms, charge thebattery using a Motorola charger exactly as describedin the charger user guide. It is recommended yourradio remains powered off while charging.

Charge a new battery 14 to 16 hours before initial usefor best performance.

Attaching the Battery

1 Align the battery with the rails on the back of theradio. Press the battery firmly, and slide upwardsuntil the latch snaps into place. Slide battery latchinto lock position.

2 To remove the battery, turn the radio off. Move thebattery latch ( ) into unlock position and hold, andslide the battery down and off the rails.

A

Pre

parin

g Y

our R

adio

for U

se

20

English

Page 22: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Attaching the AntennaCaution: If antenna needs to be replaced,ensure that only MOTOTRBO antennas areused. Neglecting this will damage your radio.

1 With the radio turned off, set the antenna in itsreceptacle and turn clockwise.

2 To remove the antenna, turn the antennacounterclockwise.

Attaching the Belt Clip

1 To attach the belt clip, align the grooves on theclip with those on the battery and press downwarduntil you hear a click.

2 To remove the belt clip, press the belt clip tabaway from the battery using a key. Then slide theclip upward and away from the radio.

Preparing Y

our Radio for U

se

21

English

Page 23: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Attaching the Universal Connector Cover(Dust Cover)

The universal connector ( ) is located on theantenna side of the radio. It is used to connectMOTOTRBO accessories to the radio.

A

Insert the hooked end of the cover into the slotsabove the universal connector. Press downward onthe cover to seat the lower tab properly into the RFconnector.

Turn the thumbscrew clockwise to secure theconnector cover to the radio.

To remove the universal connector cover, press downon the cover and turn the thumbscrewcounterclockwise.

Replace the dust cover when the universal connectoris not in use.

Powering Up the RadioRotate the On/Off/Volume Control Knob clockwiseuntil you hear a click. You see MOTOTRBO (TM) on theradio’s display momentarily, followed by a welcomemessage or welcome image.

The LED lights up solid green ( ) and the Homescreen lights up if the backlight setting is set to turnon automatically.

Pre

parin

g Y

our R

adio

for U

se

22

English

Page 24: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

A

Note: The Home screen does not light up during apower up if the LED indicator is disabled (see Turningthe LED Indicator On or Off on page 149).

A brief tone sounds, indicating that the power up testis successful.

Note: There is no power up tone if the radio tones/alerts function is disabled (see Turning the RadioTones/Alerts On or Off on page 143).

If your radio does not power up, check your battery.Make sure that it is charged and properly attached. Ifyour radio still does not power up, contact yourdealer.

To turn off the radio, rotate this knobcounterclockwise until you hear a click. You see abrief Powering Down on the radio’s display.

Adjusting the VolumeTo increase the volume, turn the On/Off/VolumeControl Knob clockwise.

To decrease the volume, turn this knobcounterclockwise.

Note: Your radio can be programmed to have aminimum volume offset where the volume levelcannot be lowered past the programmed minimumvolume. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.

Preparing Y

our Radio for U

se

23

English

Page 25: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Identifying Radio Controls

Radio Controls

1

23

4

56789

19

10

1817

1615141312

11

1 Channel Selector Knob2 On/Off/Volume Control Knob3 LED Indicator4 Side Button 1[1]

5 Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button6 Side Button 2[1]

7 Side Button 3[1]

8 Front Button P1[1]

9 Menu/OK Button10 4-Way Navigation Button11 Keypad12 Back/Home Button13 Front Button P2[1]

14 Display15 Microphone16 Speaker17 Universal Connector for Accessories18 Emergency Button[1]

19 Antenna

1 These buttons are programmable.

Iden

tifyi

ng R

adio

Con

trols

24

English

Page 26: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Using the 4–Way Navigation Button

You can use the 4–way navigation button, , toscroll through options, increase/decrease values, andnavigate vertically.

Category Direction

or or

Menu VerticalNavigation

-

Lists VerticalNavigation

-

View Details VerticalNavigation

Previous/NextItem

You can use the 4–way navigation button, , asa number, alias, or free form text editor.

EditorCategory

Direction

or or

Number - Left : Delete lastdigit

Right : -

Alias - -

Free Form Text Move cursor up/down

Move cursorone characterright/left

Numeric Values Increase/Decrease

Move cursorone characterright/left

Identifying Radio C

ontrols

25

English

Page 27: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Using the KeypadYou can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad to access your radio’s features. You can use the keypad to entersubscriber aliases or IDs, and text messages. Many characters require that you press a key multiple times. The nexttable shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character.

Key Number of Times Key is Pressed

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 . , ? ! @ & ' % — : * #

A B C 2

D E F 3

G H I 4

J K L 5

M N O 6

P Q R S 7

T U V 8Iden

tifyi

ng R

adio

Con

trols

26

English

Page 28: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Key Number of Times Key is Pressed

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

W X Y Z 9

0 Note: Press to enter “0” and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn offthe CAPS lock.

* ordel

Note: Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a “*”.

# orspace

Note: Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a “#”. Longpress to change text entry method.

Note: For the Arabic language, the text entry orientation is from right to left.

Identifying Radio C

ontrols

27

English

Page 29: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Non-Connect Plus Operations

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s O

pera

tions

28

English

Page 30: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

Push-To-Talk (PTT) ButtonThe PTT button on the side of the radio ( ) servestwo basic purposes:

A

• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allowsthe radio to transmit to other radios in the call.

Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Releasethe PTT button to listen.

The microphone is activated when the PTT buttonis pressed.

• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button isused to make a new call (see Making a Radio Callon page 50).

If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk PermitTone On or Off on page 145) or the PTT Sidetone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends beforetalking.

During a call, if the Channel Free Indication featureis enabled on your radio (programmed by yourdealer), you will hear a short alert tone the momentthe target radio (the radio that is receiving your call)releases the PTT button, indicating the channel isfree for you to respond.

You will also hear a continuous talk prohibit tone, ifyour call is interrupted, indicating that you shouldrelease the PTT button, for example when the radioreceives an Emergency Call.

Programmable ButtonsYour dealer can program the programmable buttonsas shortcuts to radio functions depending on theduration of a button press:

• Short press – Pressing and releasing rapidly.

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

29

English

Page 31: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• Long press – Pressing and holding for theprogrammed duration.

• Hold down – Keeping the button pressed.

Note: The programmed duration of a button press isapplicable for all assignable radio/utility functions orsettings. See Emergency Operation on page 94 formore information on the programmed duration of theEmergency button.

Assignable Radio Functions

Audio Toggle Toggles audio routingbetween the internal radiospeaker and the speaker ofwired accessory.

Bluetooth® AudioSwitch

Toggles audio routingbetween internal radiospeaker and externalBluetooth-enabled accessory.

Call Alert Provides direct access to thecontacts list for you to select acontact to whom a Call Alertcan be sent.

Call Forwarding Toggles Call Forwarding on oroff.

Call Log Selects the call log list.

Contacts Provides direct access to theContacts list.

Emergency Depending on theprogramming, initiates orcancels an emergency.

Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on oroff.

Manual Dial Depending on theprogramming, initiates aPrivate or Phone Call bykeying in any subscriber ID orphone number.

Manual SiteRoam[2]

Starts the manual site search.

Mic AGC On/Off Toggles the internalmicrophone automatic gaincontrol (AGC) on or off.

Monitor Monitors a selected channelfor activity.

Notifications Provides direct access to theNotifications list.

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

30

English

Page 32: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Nuisance ChannelDelete[2]

Temporarily removes anunwanted channel, except forthe Selected Channel, fromthe scan list. The SelectedChannel refers to the user’sselected zone/channelcombination from which scanis initiated.

One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefinedPrivate, Phone or Group Call,a Call Alert or a Quick Textmessage.

Option BoardFeature

Toggles option boardfeature(s) on or off for optionboard-enabled channels.

PermanentMonitor

Monitors a selected channelfor all radio traffic until functionis disabled.

Phone Provides direct access to thePhone Contacts list

Privacy Toggles privacy on or off.

Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID.

Radio Check Determines if a radio is activein a system.

Radio Enable Allows a target radio to beremotely enabled.

Radio Disable Allows a target radio to beremotely disabled.

Remote Monitor Turns on the microphone of atarget radio without it givingany indicators.

Repeater/Talkaround[2]

Toggles between using arepeater and communicatingdirectly with another radio.

Scan[2] Toggles scan on or off.

Site Info Displays current LinkedCapacity Plus site name andID. Plays site announcementvoice messages for thecurrent site (this function isunavailable when VoiceAnnouncement is disabled).

Site Lock On/Off[2] When toggled on, the radiosearches the current site only.When toggled off, the radio

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

31

English

Page 33: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

searches other sites inaddition to the current site.

Status Selects the status list menu.

Telemetry Control Controls the Output Pin on alocal or remote radio.

Text Message Selects the text messagemenu.

Transmit InterruptRemote Dekey

Stops the transmission of aremote monitored radiowithout giving any indicators,or an ongoing interruptible callto free the channel.

VoiceAnnouncement forChannel

Plays zone and channelannouncement voicemessages for the currentchannel. This function isunavailable when VoiceAnnouncement is disabled.

VoiceAnnouncementOn/Off

Toggles voice announcementon or off.

Voice OperatingTransmission(VOX)

Toggles VOX on or off.

Zone Allows selection from a list ofzones.

Assignable Settings or Utility Functions

All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts onor off.

Backlight Toggles display backlight on oroff.

BacklightBrightness

Adjusts the brightness level.

Display Mode Toggles the day/night displaymode on or off.

Keypad Lock Toggles keypad betweenlocked and unlocked.

Power Level Toggles transmit power levelbetween high and low.

2 Not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

32

English

Page 34: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Accessing the Programmed FunctionsYou can access various radio functions through oneof the following ways:

• A short or long press of the relevantprogrammable buttons.

• Use the Menu Navigation Buttons as follows:

1Press to access the menu. Press theappropriate Menu Scroll button ( or ) toaccess the menu functions.

2 To select a function or enter a sub-menu, press

the button.

3 To go back one menu level, or to return to the

previous screen, press the button. Long

press the button to return to the Homescreen.

Note: Your radio automatically exits the menuafter a period of inactivity and returns to yourHome screen.

Identifying Status Indicators

Display Icons

The 132 x 90 pixels, 256 colors, liquid crystal display(LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries,and menu entries.

The following are icons that appear on the radio’sdisplay. Icons are displayed on the status bar,arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage andare channel specific.

Received Signal Strength Indicator(RSSI)

The number of bars displayedrepresents the radio signal strength.Four bars indicate the strongest signal.This icon is only displayed whilereceiving.

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

33

English

Page 35: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Monitor

Selected channel is being monitored.

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth feature is enabled butthere is no remote Bluetooth deviceconnected.

Bluetooth Connected

The Bluetooth feature is enabled. Theicon stays lit when a remote Bluetoothdevice is connected.

Sign In

Radio is signed in to the remote server.

Sign Out

Radio is signed out of the remote server.

High Volume Data

Radio is receiving high volume data andchannel is busy.

Job Ticket Notification

Notification List has items to review.

or Power Level

Radio is set at Low power or Radio isset at High power.

Tones Disable

Tones are turned off.

Option Board

The Option Board is enabled.

Option Board Non-Function

The Option Board is disabled.

Over-the-Air Programming DelayTimer

Indicates time left before automaticrestart of radio.

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

34

English

Page 36: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

GPS Available

The GPS feature is enabled. The iconstays lit when a position fix is available.

GPS Not Available/Out of Range

The GPS feature is enabled but is notreceiving data from the satellite.

Scan[3][4]

Scan feature is enabled.

Scan- Priority 1[3][4]

Radio detects activity on channel/groupdesignated as Priority 1.

Scan- Priority 2[3][4]

Radio detects activity on channel/groupdesignated as Priority 2.

Vote Scan

Vote scan feature is enabled.

Flexible Receive List

Flexible receive list is enabled.

Emergency

Radio is in Emergency mode.

Secure

The Privacy feature is enabled.

Unsecure

The Privacy feature is disabled.

Site Roaming[3]

The site roaming feature is enabled.

Talkaround[3][4]

In the absence of a repeater, radio iscurrently configured for direct radio toradio communication.

Battery

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

35

English

Page 37: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The number of bars (0 – 4) shownindicates the charge remaining in thebattery. Blinks when the battery is low.

Call Icons

The following icons appear on the radio’s displayduring a call. These icons also appear in the Contactslist to indicate ID type.

Private Call

Indicates a Private Call in progress. Inthe Contacts list, it indicates asubscriber alias (name) or ID(number).

Group Call/All Call

Indicates a Group Call or All Call inprogress. In the Contacts list, itindicates a group alias (name) or ID(number).

Phone Call as Private Call

Indicates a Phone Call as Private Callin progress. In the Contacts list, itindicates a phone alias (name) or ID(number).

Phone Call as Group/All Call

Indicates a Phone Call as Group/AllCall in progress. In the Contacts list, itindicates a group alias (name) or ID(number).

Bluetooth PC Call

Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call inprogress. In the Contacts list, it

3 Not applicable in Capacity Plus4 Not applicable in Linked Capacity Plus

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

36

English

Page 38: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

indicates a Bluetooth PC Call alias(name) or ID (number).

Advanced Menu Icons

The following icons appear beside menu items thatoffer a choice between two options or as an indicationthat there is a sub-menu offering two options.

Checkbox (Empty)

Indicates the option is not selected.

Checkbox (Checked)

Indicates the option is selected.

Solid Black Box

Indicates the option selected for the menuitem with a sub-menu.

Mini Notice Icons

The following icons appear momentarily on theradio’s display after an action to perform task istaken.

Successful Transmission(Positive)

Successful action taken.

Failed Transmission (Negative)

Failed action taken.

Transmission in Progress(Transitional)

Transmitting. This is seen beforeindication for SuccessfulTransmission or Failed Transmission.

Sent Item Icons

The following icons appear at the top right corner ofthe radio’s display in the Sent Items folder.

OR

Sent Successfully

The text message is sent successfully.

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

37

English

Page 39: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

OR

Send Failed

The text message has not been sent.

OR

In-Progress

• The text message to a group alias or IDis pending transmission.

• The text message to a subscriber aliasor ID is pending transmission, followedby waiting for acknowledgement.

Bluetooth Device Icons

The following icons also appear next to items in thelist of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicatethe device type.

Bluetooth Data Device

Bluetooth-enabled data device, suchas a scanner.

Bluetooth Audio Device

Bluetooth-enabled audio device,such as a headset.

Bluetooth PTT Device

Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, suchas a PTT-Only Device (POD).

Job Tickets Icons

All Jobs

Indicates all jobs listed.

New Jobs

Indicates new jobs.

LED Indicator

The LED indicator ( ) shows the operational status ofyour radio.

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

38

English

Page 40: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

A

Blinking red Radio is transmitting at lowbattery condition, receivingan emergencytransmission, has failedthe self-test upon poweringup, or has moved out ofrange if radio is configuredwith Auto-RangeTransponder System.

Solid yellow Radio is monitoring aconventional channel or inBluetooth DiscoverableMode.

Blinking yellow Radio is scanning foractivity or receiving a CallAlert, flexible receive list isenabled or all local LinkedCapacity Plus channelsare busy.

Double blinkingyellow

Radio is no longerconnected to the repeaterwhile in Capacity Plus orLinked Capacity Plus; allCapacity Plus or LinkedCapacity Plus channelsare currently busy. AutoRoaming is enabled, radiois actively searching for anew site. Also indicatesthat radio has yet torespond to a group callalert, or radio is locked.

Solid green Radio is powering up ortransmitting.

Blinking green Radio is powering up,receiving a non-privacy-enabled call or data, or

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

39

English

Page 41: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

detecting activity, orretrieving Over-the-AirProgrammingtransmissions over the air.

Double blinking green Radio is receiving aprivacy-enabled call ordata.

Note: While in conventional mode, when the LEDblinks green, it indicates the radio detects activityover the air. Due to the nature of the digital protocol,this activity may or may not affect the radio'sprogrammed channel.

For Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus, there isno LED indication when the radio is detecting activityover the air.

Audio Tones

Audio tones provide you with audible indications ofthe status, or response to data received on the radio.

Continuous Tone A monotone sound.Sounds continuouslyuntil termination.

Periodic Tone Sounds periodicallydepending on theduration set by the radio.Tone starts, stops, andrepeats itself.

Repetitive Tone A single tone thatrepeats itself until it isterminated by the user.

Momentary Tone Sounds only once for ashort period of timedefined by the radio.

Indicator Tones

High pitched tone Low pitched tone

Positive Indicator Tone

Negative Indicator Tone

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

40

English

Page 42: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Switching Between Conventional Analog andDigital Mode

Each channel in your radio can be configured as aconventional analog or conventional digital channel.Use the Channel Selector Knob ( ) to switchbetween an analog or a digital channel.

A

When switching from digital to analog mode, certainfeatures are unavailable. Icons for the digital features(such as Messages) reflect this change by appearing‘grayed out’. Disabled features are hidden in themenu.

Your radio also has features available in both analogand digital mode. However, the minor differences inthe way each feature works does not affect theperformance of your radio.

Note: Your radio also switches between digital andanalog modes during a dual mode scan (see Scan onpage 73).

IP Site Connect This feature allows your radio to extend conventionalcommunication beyond the reach of a single site, byconnecting to different available sites which areconnected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network.

When the radio moves out of range from one site andinto the range of another, it connects to the new site'srepeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions.Depending on your settings, this is doneautomatically or manually.

If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scansthrough all available sites when the signal from thecurrent site is weak or when the radio is unable todetect any signal from the current site. It then lockson to the repeater with the strongest Received SignalStrength Indicator (RSSI) value.

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

41

English

Page 43: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

In a manual site search, the radio searches for thenext site in the roam list that is currently in range (butwhich may not have the strongest signal) and lockson to it.

Note: Each channel can only have either Scan orRoam enabled, not both at the same time.

Channels with this feature enabled can be added to aparticular roam list. The radio searches the channel(s)in the roam list during the automatic roam operationto locate the best site.

A roam list supports a maximum of 16 channels(including the Selected Channel).

Note: You cannot manually add or delete an entry tothe roam list. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.

Capacity Plus Capacity Plus is a single-site trunking configuration ofthe MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool ofchannels to support hundreds of users and up to 254Groups. This feature allows your radio to efficientlyutilize the available number of programmed channelswhile in Repeater Mode.

You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to accessa feature not applicable to Capacity Plus via aprogrammable button press.

Your radio also has features that are available inconventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, CapacityPlus and Linked Capacity Plus. However, the minordifferences in the way each feature works does notaffect the performance of your radio.

Check with your dealer or system administrator formore information on this configuration.

Linked Capacity Plus Linked Capacity Plus is a multi-site multi-channeltrunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radiosystem, combining the best of both Capacity Plus andIP Site Connect configurations.

Linked Capacity Plus allows your radio to extendtrunking communication beyond the reach of a singlesite, by connecting to different available sites whichare connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network. Italso provides an increase in capacity by efficientlyutilizing the combined available number ofprogrammed channels supported by each of theavailable sites.

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

42

English

Page 44: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

When the radio moves out of range from one site andinto the range of another, it connects to the new site'srepeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions.Depending on your settings, this is doneautomatically or manually.

If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scansthrough all available sites when the signal from thecurrent site is weak or when the radio is unable todetect any signal from the current site. It then lockson to the repeater with the strongest Received SignalStrength Indicator (RSSI) value.

In a manual site search, the radio searches for thenext site in the roam list that is currently in range (butwhich may not have the strongest signal) and lockson to it.

Any channel with Linked Capacity Plus enabled canbe added to a particular roam list. The radio searchesthese channels during the automatic roam operationto locate the best site.

Note: You cannot manually add or delete an entry tothe roam list. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.

Similar to Capacity Plus, icons of features notapplicable to Linked Capacity Plus are not available

in the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if youtry to access a feature not applicable to LinkedCapacity Plus via a programmable button press.

Check with your dealer or system administrator formore information on this configuration.

Additional R

adio Controls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

43

English

Page 45: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode

Selecting a ZoneA zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports upto 1000 channels and 250 zones, with a maximum of160 channels per zone.

1 Access the Zone feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedZone button

Press the programmed Zonebutton.

Radio menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Zone and

press to select.

The current zone is displayed and indicated by a.

2 Select the required zone.

RadioControl

Steps

or or and scroll to the requiredzone.

Keypad 1 Enter the first character of therequired zone.

2 A blinking cursor appears allowingyou to continue entering thesubsequent characters of therequired zone.

Note: Press to move one space to

the left. Press to move one space

to the right. Press the key todelete any unwanted characters.

Long press to change the textentry method.

Note: The first line of the displayshows the characters you keyed in.The second line shows a zone thatmatches what you have alreadykeyed in. The alias search is case-

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

44

English

Page 46: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControl

Steps

insensitive. If there are two or morewith the same name, the radiodisplays the zone that is listed first inthe zone list.

3Press to select.The display shows <Zone> Selectedmomentarily and returns to the selected zonescreen.

Selecting a ChannelTransmissions are sent and received on a channel.Depending on your radio’s configuration, eachchannel may have been programmed differently tosupport different groups of users or supplied withdifferent features. After selecting the relevant Zone,select the relevant channel you require to transmit orreceive on.

Turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob toselect the channel, subscriber alias or ID, or groupalias or ID.

Receiving and Responding to a Radio CallOnce the channel, subscriber ID, or group ID isdisplayed, you can proceed to receive and respond tocalls.

The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and blinks green when the radio isreceiving.

Note: The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and double blinks green when the radiois receiving a privacy-enabled call.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

45

English

Page 47: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radiomust have the same Privacy Key, OR the same KeyValue and Key ID (programmed by your dealer), asthe transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving thecall from).

See Privacy on page 120 for more information.

Receiving and Responding to a Group Call

To receive a call from a group of users, your radiomust be configured as part of that group.

When you receive a Group Call (while on the Homescreen), the LED blinks green. The Group Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text lineshows the caller alias. The second text line displaysthe group call alias. Your radio unmutes and theincoming call sounds through the radio's speaker.

1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

• If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone themoment the transmitting radio releases thePTT button, indicating the channel is free foryou to respond. Press the PTT button torespond.

• If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled,press the PTT button to stop the current callfrom the transmitting radio and free the channelfor you to talk/respond.

The LED lights up solid green.

2 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• The Talk Permit Tone.• The PTT Sidetone.

3 Release the PTT button to listen.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined periodof time, the call ends.

See Making a Group Call on page 50 for details onmaking a Group Call.

Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

A Private Call is a call from an individual radio toanother individual radio.

When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinksgreen. The Private Call icon appears in the top rightcorner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Your

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

46

English

Page 48: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds throughthe radio's speaker.

1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

• If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone themoment the transmitting radio releases thePTT button, indicating the channel is free foryou to respond. Press the PTT button torespond.

• If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled,press the PTT button to stop the current callfrom the transmitting radio and free the channelfor you to talk/respond.

The LED lights up solid green.

2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

3 Release the PTT button to listen.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined periodof time, the call ends.

You hear a short tone. The display shows CallEnded.

See Making a Private Call on page 51 for details onmaking a Private Call.

Receiving an All Call

An All Call is a call from an individual radio to everyradio on the channel. It is used to make importantannouncements requiring the user’s full attention.

When you receive an All Call, a tone sounds and theLED blinks green.

The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.The first text line shows the caller alias. The secondtext line displays All Call. Your radio unmutes andthe incoming call sounds through the radio speaker.

Once the All Call ends, the radio returns to theprevious screen before receiving the call. An All Calldoes not wait for a predetermined time before ending.

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,you hear a short alert tone the moment thetransmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicatingthe channel is now available for use.

You cannot respond to an All Call.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

47

English

Page 49: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Note: See Making an All Call on page 52 for detailson making an All Call.

Note: The radio stops receiving the All Call if youswitch to a different channel while receiving the call.During an All Call, you will not be able to use anyprogrammed button functions until the call ends.

Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call

A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio toanother individual radio. It is a Private Call on ananalog system.

When you receive a Selective Call, the LED blinksgreen. The Private Call icon appears in the top rightcorner. The first text line shows the caller alias orSelective Call or Alert with Call. The first textline shows the Private Call icon. The radio displaysSelective Call or Alert with Call. Your radiounmutes and the incoming call sounds through theradio's speaker.

1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call.The LED lights up solid green.

3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

4 Release the PTT button to listen.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined periodof time, the call ends.

You hear a short tone. The display shows CallEnded.

See Making a Private Call on page 51 for details onmaking a Private Call.

Receiving and Responding to a Phone Call

Phone Call as Private Call

When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call, thePhone Call icon appears in the top right corner; thedisplay shows the caller alias or Phone Call.

If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio,the first line of the display shows Unavailable andyour radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to theprevious screen when the call ends.

1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

48

English

Page 50: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2Press to end the call.

The display shows Ending Phone Call.

If successful, a tone sounds and the display showsCall Ended.

If successful, a tone sounds and the display showsCall Ended.

If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the PhoneCall screen. Repeat this step or wait for thetelephone user to end the call.

Phone Call as Group Call

When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call, thePhone Group Call icon appears in the top rightcorner; the display shows the group alias and PhoneCall.

If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio,the display shows Unavailable and your radiomutes the call.

1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

2Press to end the call.

The display shows Ending Phone Call.

If successful, a tone sounds and the display showsCall Ended.

If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the PhoneCall screen. Repeat this step or wait for thetelephone user to end the call.

Phone Call as All Call

When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, thePhone Call icon appears in the top right corner; thedisplay shows All Call and Phone Call.

If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio,the first line of the display shows Unavailable andyour radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to theprevious screen when the call ends.

Note: When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call,you can respond to the call or end the call, only if anAll Call type is assigned to the channel.

1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

49

English

Page 51: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2Press to end the call.The display shows Ending Phone Call.

If successful, a tone sounds and the display showsAll Call and Call Ended.

If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the PhoneCall screen. Repeat this step to end the call.

Making a Radio CallAfter selecting your channel, you can select asubscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:

• The Channel Selector Knob.• A programmed One Touch Access button – The

One Touch Access feature allows you to make aGroup or Private Call to a predefined ID easily.This feature can be assigned to a short or longprogrammable button press. You can ONLY haveone ID assigned to a One Touch Access button.Your radio can have multiple One Touch Accessbuttons programmed.

• The programmed number keys – This method isfor Group, Private and All Calls only and is usedwith the keypad (see Making a Group, Private or

All Call with the Programmable Number Key onpage 56).

• A programmable button – This method is forPhone Calls only (see Making a Phone Call withthe Programmable Phone Button on page 57).

• The Contacts list (see Contact Settings on page76).

• Manual Dial – This method is for Private andPhone Calls only and is dialed using the keypad(see Making a Phone Call from Contacts on page78, Making a Private Call from Contacts on page77, and Making a Call with the ProgrammableManual Dial Button on page 59).

Note: Your radio must have the Privacy featureenabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabledtransmission. Only target radios with the samePrivacy Key OR the same Key Value and Key ID asyour radio will be able to unscramble thetransmission.

Note: See Privacy on page 120 for more information.

Making a Group Call

To make a call to a group of users, your radio mustbe configured as part of that group.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

50

English

Page 52: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

1 Do one of the following.

• Select the channel with the active group aliasor ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 45.

• Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Group Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the group call alias.

4 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen. You see the Group Call icon, the groupalias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID onyour display.

5 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. Radio returns to thescreen you were on prior to initiating the call.

Note: You can also make a Group Call via Contacts(see Making a Group Call from Contacts on page76).

Making a Private Call

While you can receive and/or respond to a PrivateCall initiated by an authorized individual radio, yourradio must be programmed for you to initiate a PrivateCall.

There are two types of Private Calls. The first type,where a radio presence check is performed prior tosetting up the call, while the other sets up the callimmediately.

Only one of these call types can be programmed toyour radio by your dealer.

You will hear a negative indicator tone, when youmake a Private Call via the One Touch Accessbutton, the programmed number keys, or the ChannelSelector Knob, if this feature is not enabled.

Use the Text Message or Call Alert features tocontact an individual radio. See Text Message

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

51

English

Page 53: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Features on page 102 or Call Alert Operation onpage 92 for more information.

1 Do one of the following.

• Select the channel with the active subscriberalias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page45.

• Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Private Callicon appears on the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.

4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

6 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. You hear a shorttone. The display shows Call Ended.

Your radio may be programmed to perform a radiopresence check prior to setting up the Private Call. Ifthe target radio is not available, you hear a short toneand see negative mini notice on the display. You canalso make a Private Call via Contacts (see Making aPrivate Call from Contacts on page 77) or perform aquick alphanumeric search for the required alias via akeypad entry (see Making a Group, Private, Phone orAll Call by Alias Search on page 82).

Making an All Call

This feature allows you to transmit to all users on thechannel. Your radio must be programmed to allowyou to use this feature.

Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call.Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

52

English

Page 54: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

1 Select the channel with the active All Call groupalias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 45.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green.The Group Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text lineshows All Call.

4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• The Talk Permit Tone.• The PTT Sidetone.

Making a Selective Call

Just like a Private Call, while you can receive and/orrespond to a Selective Call initiated by an authorizedindividual radio, your radio must be programmed foryou to initiate a Selective Call.

1 Select the channel with the active subscriber aliasor ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 45.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Private Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.

4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• The Talk Permit Tone.• The PTT Sidetone.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

53

English

Page 55: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The display shows Call Ended.

Making a Phone Call with the One Touch AccessButton

1 Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to make a Phone Call to the predefinedalias or ID.If the entry for the One Touch Access button isempty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If theaccess code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows Access Code:.

Enter the access code and press to proceed.

The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.

If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tonesounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephoneuser. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.The Phone Call icon remains in the top rightcorner.

If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone soundsand the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your

radio returns to the Access Code input screen. Ifthe access code was preconfigured in theContacts list, the radio returns to the screen youwere on prior to initiating the call.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

To enter extra digits, if requested by the PhoneCall, enter the extra digits using the keypad and

press to proceed.

The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press,and the radio returns to the previous screen.

4Press to end the call.

If de-access code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows De-AccessCode:. Do one of the following.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

54

English

Page 56: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

•Enter the de-access code and press toproceed. The radio returns to the previousscreen.

• Press the One Touch Access button. If theentry for the One Touch Access button isempty, a negative indicator tone sounds.

The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press,and the display shows Ending Phone Call.

If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone soundsand the display shows Call Ended.

If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radioreturns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 4 orwait for the telephone user to end the call.

Note: When the telephone user ends the call, atone sounds and the display shows Call Ended.

If the call ends while you are entering the extradigits requested by the Phone Call, your radioreturns to the screen you were on prior to initiatingthe call.

During channel access, press to dismiss thecall attempt. A tone sounds to indicate success.

During the call, if you press the One TouchAccess button with the deaccess codepreconfigured or enter the deaccess code as theinput for extra digits, your radio attempts to endthe call.

The access or deaccess code cannot be morethan 10 characters.

Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button

Note: Programmable buttons press must be initiatedfrom the Home screen.

The One Touch Call feature allows you to easilymake a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call aliasor ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or longprogrammable button press.

You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to aOne Touch Call button. Your radio can have multipleOne Touch Call buttons programmed.

1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button tomake a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Callalias or ID.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

55

English

Page 57: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green.

The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.

4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,you will hear a short alert tone the moment thetarget radio releases the PTT button, indicating thechannel is free for you to respond. Press the PTTbutton to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

Making a Group, Private or All Call with theProgrammable Number Key

The Programmable Number Key feature allows you tomake a Group, Private or All Call to a predefined aliasor ID easily. This feature can be assigned to all theavailable number keys on a keypad.

You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to anumber key, but you can have more than one numberkey associated to an alias or ID.

1 Long press the programmed number key, whenyou are on the Home screen, to make a Group,Private or All Call to the predefined alias or ID.If the number key is not associated to an entry, anegative indicator tone sounds.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Group/PrivateCall icon appears in the top right corner. The firsttext line shows the caller alias. The second textline displays either the call status for a Private Callor All Call for All Call.

4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• The Talk Permit Tone.• the PTT Sidetone (Group Call only)

5 Release the PTT button to listen.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

56

English

Page 58: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

6 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. Radio returns to thescreen you were on prior to initiating the call.

For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when thecall ends.

See Assigning an Entry to a ProgrammableNumber Key on page 83 for details on assigningan entry to a number key on the keypad.

Making a Phone Call with the Programmable PhoneButton

1 Press the programmed Phone button to enter intothe Phone Entry list.

2 or to the required subscriber alias or ID,

and press to select.If the access code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows Access Code:.

Enter the access code and press the buttonto proceed.

The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.

If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tonesounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephoneuser. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.The Phone Call icon remains in the top rightcorner.The second text line displays the callstatus.

If call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds andthe display shows Phone Call Failed. Yourradio returns to the Access Code input screen. Ifthe access code was preconfigured in theContacts list, the radio returns to the screen youwere on prior to initiating the call.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

57

English

Page 59: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

3 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

4 Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

5 To enter extra digits, if requested by the PhoneCall, do one of the following.

• Press any keypad key to begin the input of theextra digits. The first line of the display showsExtra Digits:. The second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits

and press the button to proceed. TheDTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to theprevious screen.

• Press One Touch Access button. The DTMFtone sounds. If the entry for the One TouchAccess button is empty, a negative indicatortone sounds.

6Press to end the call.

If deaccess code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display

shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code

and press the button to proceed. The radioreturns to the previous screen.

The DTMF tone sounds and the display showsEnding Phone Call.

If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone soundsand the display shows Call Ended.

If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radioreturns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Steps 4and 6 or wait for the telephone user to end thecall.

When you press PTT button while in the PhoneContacts screen, a tone sounds and the displayshows Press OK to Place Phone Call.

When the telephone user ends the call, a tonesounds and the display shows Phone CallEnded.

If the call ends while you are entering the extradigits requested by the Phone Call, your radioreturns to the screen you were on prior to initiatingthe call.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

58

English

Page 60: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Note: During channel access, press todismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds.

During the call, when you press One TouchAccess button with the deaccess codepreconfigured or enter the deaccess code as theinput for extra digits, your radio attempts to endthe call.

Note: The access or deaccess code cannot bemore than 10 characters.

Making a Call with the Programmable Manual DialButton

Making a Private Call

1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button toenter into the Manual Dial screen.

2 or to Radio Contact and press to

select.The display shows Number:.

3 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias.

4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

5 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Private Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.

6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.

7 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,you will hear a short alert tone the moment thetarget radio releases the PTT button, indicating thechannel is free for you to respond. Press the PTTbutton to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. You hear a shorttone. The display shows Call Ended.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

59

English

Page 61: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Making a Phone Call

1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button toenter into the Manual Dial screen.

2 or to Phone Contact and press to

select.The display shows Number:.

3 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias.If the access code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows Access Code:.

Enter the access code and press the buttonto proceed.

The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.

If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tonesounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephoneuser. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.The Phone Call icon remains in the top rightcorner.

If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone soundsand the display shows Phone Call Failed. Yourradio returns to the Access Code input screen. Ifthe access code was preconfigured in theContacts list, the radio returns to the screen youwere on prior to initiating the call.

4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

5 Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

6 To enter extra digits, if requested by the PhoneCall, do one of the following.

• Press any keypad key to begin the input of theextra digits. Enter the extra digits and press the

button to proceed. The DTMF tonesounds and the radio returns to the previousscreen.

• Press One Touch Access button. The DTMFtone sounds. If the entry for the One TouchAccess button is empty, a negative indicatortone sounds.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

60

English

Page 62: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

7Press to end the call.

If deaccess code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows De-AccessCode:. Enter the deaccess code and press the

button to proceed. The radio returns to theprevious screen.

The DTMF tone sounds and the display showsEnding Phone Call.

If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone soundsand the display shows Call Ended.

If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radioreturns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 7 orwait for the telephone user to end the call.

When you press PTT button while in the PhoneContacts screen, a tone sounds and the displayshows Press OK to Place Phone Call.

When the telephone user ends the call, a tonesounds and the display shows Phone CallEnded.

If the call ends while you are entering the extradigits requested by the Phone Call, your radio

returns to the screen you were on prior to initiatingthe call.

Note: During channel access, press todismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds.

Note: During the call, when you press One TouchAccess button with the deaccess codepreconfigured or enter the deaccess code as theinput for extra digits, your radio attempts to endthe call.

Note: The access or deaccess code cannot bemore than 10 characters.

Stopping a Radio Call This feature allows you to stop an ongoing Group orPrivate Call to free the channel for transmission. Forexample, when a radio experiences a “stuckmicrophone” condition where the PTT button isinadvertently pressed by the user.

Your radio must be programmed to allow you to usethis feature.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

61

English

Page 63: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

1 Press the programmed Transmit InterruptRemote Dekey button, while on the relevantchannel.The display shows Remote Dekey.

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicatortone and the display shows Remote DekeySuccess, indicating that the channel is now free.

If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone and the display shows RemoteDekey Failed.

TalkaroundYou can continue to communicate when yourrepeater is not operating, or when your radio is out ofthe repeater’s range but within talking range of otherradios.

This is called “talkaround”.

Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plusand Linked Capacity Plus.

The Talkaround setting is retained even afterpowering down.

You can toggle between talkaround and repeatermodes by pressing the programmed Repeater/Talkaround button or using the radio menu asdescribed next.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Talkaround and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5Press to enable/disable the Talkaround.

The display shows beside Enabled.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

62

English

Page 64: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Monitoring Features

Monitoring a Channel

Use the Monitor feature to make sure a channel isclear before transmitting.

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus andLinked Capacity Plus.

1 Press and hold the programmed Monitor buttonand listen for activity.

The Monitor icon appears on the display and theLED lights up solid yellow. You hear radio activityor total silence, depending on how your radio isprogrammed. This indicates that the channel is inuse.

The LED double blinks yellow when channel isbusy.

2 Wait until you hear “white noise”. This indicatesthat the channel is free.

3 Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

Permanent Monitor

Use the Permanent Monitor feature to continuouslymonitor a selected channel for activity.

Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plusand Linked Capacity Plus.

1 Press the programmed Permanent Monitorbutton to activate permanent monitoring of thechannel.Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED lights up solidyellow, and the display shows PermanentMonitor On. The Monitor icon appears on thedisplay.

2 Press the programmed Permanent Monitorbutton to exit Permanent Monitor mode.Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED turns off, andthe display shows Permanent Monitor Off.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

63

English

Page 65: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Advanced Features in Non-ConnectPlus Mode

Radio CheckIf enabled, this feature allows you to determine ifanother radio is active in a system without disturbingthe user of that radio. No audible or visual notificationis shown on the target radio.

This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliasesor IDs.

Sending a Radio Check

1 Access the Radio Check feature.RadioControl

Steps

ProgrammedRadio Checkbutton

1 Press the programmed RadioCheck button.

2 or to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID and

press to select.

RadioControl

Steps

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and

press to select.3 Use one of the steps

described next to select therequired subscriber alias orID:

• Select the subscriber aliasor ID directly.

• or to therequired subscriberalias or ID and press

to select.• Use the Manual Dial

menu.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

64

English

Page 66: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControl

Steps

• or to Manual

Dial and press toselect.

• or to Radio

Number and press to select.

• If there was previouslydialed ID, the IDappears along with ablinking cursor. Else,the first line of thedisplay shows RadioNumber:; the secondline of the displayshows a blinking cursor.Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID, and press

to select.

RadioControl

Steps

4 or to Radio Check

and press to select.

The display shows transitional mini notice,indicating the request is in progress. The LEDlights up solid green.

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

If the button is pressed when the radio iswaiting for acknowledgement, a tone sounds, andthe radio terminates all retries and exits RadioCheck mode.

If Radio Check is successful, a positive indicatortone sounds and the display shows positive mininotice.

If Radio Check is unsuccessful, a negativeindicator tone sounds and the display showsnegative mini notice.

Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

65

English

Page 67: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Remote MonitorUse the Remote Monitor feature to turn on themicrophone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDsonly). The green LED will blink once on the targetsubscriber. You can use this feature to monitor,remotely, any audible activity surrounding the targetradio.

Your radio must be programmed to allow you to usethis feature.

Initiating Remote Monitor

1 Access the Remote Monitor feature.RadioControl

Steps

Programmed RemoteMonitorButton

1 Press the programmed RemoteMonitor button.

2 or to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID and press

to select.

RadioControl

Steps

Menu 1 to access the menu

2 or to Contacts and

press to select3 Use one of the steps described

next to select the requiredsubscriber alias or ID

• select the subscriber alias orID directly

• or to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID and

press to select.• use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual

Dial and press toselect.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

66

English

Page 68: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControl

Steps

• or to Radio

Number and press toselect.

• If there was previouslydialed ID, the ID appearsalong with a blinkingcursor. Else, the first lineof the display showsRadio Number:; thesecond line of the displayshows a blinking cursor.Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID, and press

to select.4 or to Remote Mon. and

press to select.

The display shows transitional mini notice,indicating the request is in progress. The LEDlights up solid green.

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds andthe display shows positive mini notice. Your radiostarts playing audio from the monitored radio for aprogrammed duration and display shows Rem.Monitor. Once the timer expires, the radio soundsan alert tone and the LED turns off.

If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone the display shows negative mininotice.

Stopping Remote Monitor

Remote Monitor automatically stops after aprogrammed duration or when there is any useroperation on the target radio. Follow the steps belowto manually stop Remote Monitor.

1 Press the programmed Transmit InterruptRemote Dekey button.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

67

English

Page 69: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The display shows transitional mini notice,indicating the request is in progress. The LEDlights up solid green.

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicatortone and the display shows positive mini notice.

If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone and the display shows negative mininotice.

Scan ListsScan lists are created and assigned to individualchannels/groups. Your radio scans for voice activityby cycling through the channel/group sequencespecified in the scan list for the current channel/group.

Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with amaximum of 16 members in a list. Each scan listsupports a mixture of both analog and digital entries.

You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editinga scan list.

You can attach a new scan list to your radio via FrontPanel Programming.

Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plusand Linked Capacity Plus.

Viewing an Entry in the Scan List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Scan List and press to select.

4 Use or to view each member on the list.

The Priority icon appears left of the member’salias, if set, to indicate whether the member is ona Priority 1 or Priority 2 channel list. You cannothave multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2 channels in ascan list.

There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

68

English

Page 70: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Scan List and press to select.

4 Key in the first character of the required alias.A blinking cursor appears.

5 Use the keypad to type the required alias.

Press to move one space to the left. Press to

move one space to the right. Press the keyto delete any unwanted characters. Long press

to change text entry method.

The first line of the display shows the charactersyou keyed in. The next lines of the display showthe shortlisted search results.

The alias search is case-insensitive. If there aretwo or more entries with the same name, the radiodisplays the entry that is listed first in the scan list.

Editing the Scan List

Adding a New Entry to the Scan List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Scan List and press to select.

4 or to Add Member and press to

select.

5 Select the required alias or ID by performing oneof the following actions:

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

69

English

Page 71: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControl

Steps

RadioNavigationButtons

or to the required alias orID.

Keypad Key in the first character of therequired alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

Press to move one space to the

left. Press to move one space to

the right. Press the key todelete any unwanted characters.

Long press to change thetext entry method.

The first line of the display showsthe characters you keyed in. Thenext lines of the display show theshort listed search results. Thealias search is case-insensitive. Ifthere are two or more aliases with

RadioControl

Steps

the same name, the radio displaysthe alias that is listed first in the list.

6Press to select.

7 or to the required priority level and press

to select.The display shows positive mini notice, followedimmediately by Add Another?.

8 Do one of the following:

• or to Yes and press to select, and

repeat Steps 5 to 7.•

or to No and press to save thecurrent list.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

70

English

Page 72: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Deleting an Entry from the Scan List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Scan List and press to select.

4 Select the required alias or ID by performing oneof the following actions:RadioControl

Steps

RadioNavigationButtons

or to the required alias orID.

Keypad Key in the first character of therequired alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

Press to move one space to the

left. Press to move one space to

RadioControl

Steps

the right. Press the key todelete any unwanted characters.

Long press to change thetext entry method.

The first line of the display showsthe characters you keyed in. Thenext lines of the display show theshort listed search results. Thealias search is case-insensitive. Ifthere are two or more aliases withthe same name, the radio displaysthe alias that is listed first in the list.

5Press to select.

6 or to Delete and press to select.

7 Do one of the following:

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

71

English

Page 73: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• At Delete Entry?, or to Yes and

press to delete entry. The display showspositive mini notice.

• or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

8 Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to delete other entries.After deleting all required aliases or IDs, long

press to return to the Home screen.

Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in theScan List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Scan List and press to select.

4 Select the required alias or ID by performing oneof the following actions:

RadioControl

Steps

RadioNavigationButtons

or to the required alias orID.

Keypad Key in the first character of therequired alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

Press to move one space to the

left. Press to move one space to

the right. Press the key todelete any unwanted characters.

Long press to change thetext entry method.

The first line of the display showsthe characters you keyed in. Thenext lines of the display show theshort listed search results. Thealias search is case-insensitive. Ifthere are two or more aliases with

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

72

English

Page 74: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControl

Steps

the same name, the radio displaysthe alias that is listed first in the list.

5Press to select.

6 or to Edit Priority and press to

select.

7 or to the required priority level and press

to select.The display shows positive mini notice beforereturning to the previous screen.

Note: The Priority icon appears left of themember’s name.

There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None.

ScanWhen you start a scan, your radio cycles through theprogrammed scan list for the current channel lookingfor voice activity.

The LED blinks yellow and the scan icon appears onthe status bar.

During a dual mode scan, if you are on a digitalchannel, and your radio locks onto an analogchannel, it automatically switches from digital mode toanalog mode for the duration of the call. This is alsotrue for the reverse.

There are two ways of initiating scan:

• Main Channel Scan (Manual): Your radio scansall the channels/groups in your scan list. Onentering scan, your radio may – depending on thesettings – automatically start on the last scanned“active” channel/group or on the channel wherescan was initiated.

• Auto Scan (Automatic): Your radio automaticallystarts scanning when you select a channel/groupthat has Auto Scan enabled.

Note: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plusand Linked Capacity Plus.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

73

English

Page 75: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Starting and Stopping Scan

While scanning, the radio will only accept data (e.g.text message, location, or PC data) if received on itsSelected Channel.

1 Use the Channel Selector Knob to select achannel programmed with a scan list.

2 to access the menu.

3 or to Scan and press to select.

4 or to Scan State and press to

select.

5 or to required scan state and press

to select.

• The display shows Scan On when Scan isenabled. The LED blinks yellow and the scanicon appears.

• The display shows Scan Off if Scan isdisabled. The LED turns off and the scan icondisappears.

Responding to a Transmission During a Scan

During scanning, your radio stops on a channel/groupwhere activity is detected. The radio stays on thatchannel for a programmed time period known as“hang time”.

1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

2 Press the PTT button during hang time.The LED lights up solid green.

3 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• The Talk Permit Tone.• The PTT Sidetone.

4 Release the PTT button to listen.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

74

English

Page 76: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

If you do not respond within the hang time, theradio returns to scanning other channels/groups.

Deleting a Nuisance Channel

If a channel continually generates unwanted calls ornoise (termed a “nuisance” channel), you cantemporarily remove the unwanted channel from thescan list.

This capability does not apply to the channeldesignated as the Selected Channel.

Deleting a “nuisance” channel is only possiblethrough the programmed Nuisance Channel Deletebutton. This feature is not accessible through themenu.

1 When your radio “locks on to” an unwanted ornuisance channel, press the programmedNuisance Channel Delete button until you hear atone.

2 Release the Nuisance Channel Delete button.The nuisance channel is deleted.

Restoring a Nuisance Channel

To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one ofthe following:

• Turn the radio off and then power it on again.• Stop and restart a scan via the programmed Scan

button or menu.• Change the channel via the Channel Selector

Knob.

Vote Scan Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage inareas where there are multiple base stationstransmitting identical information on different analogchannels.

Your radio scans analog channels of multiple basestations and performs a voting process to select thestrongest received signal. Once that is established,your radio unmutes to transmissions from that basestation.

The LED blinks yellow and the vote scan iconappears on the status bar.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

75

English

Page 77: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

To respond to a transmission during a Vote Scan,follow the same procedures as Responding to aTransmission During a Scan on page 74.

Contact SettingsContacts provides “address-book” capabilities on yourradio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID thatyou use to initiate a call.

Each entry, depending on context, associates withone of five types of calls: Group Call, Private Call, AllCall, PC Call or Dispatch Call.

PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They areonly available with the applications. Refer to the dataapplications documentation for more information.

Note: If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel,you can make privacy-enabled Group Call, PrivateCall, and All Call on that channel. Only target radioswith the same Privacy Key OR the same Key Valueand Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramblethe transmission.

See Privacy on page 120 for more information.

Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assigneach entry to a programmable number key or more

on a keypad. If an entry is assigned to a number key,your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry.

Your radio supports two Contacts lists, one for Analogcontacts and one for Digital contacts, with a maximumof 500 members for each Contacts list.

Each entry within Contacts displays the followinginformation:

• Call Type.• Call Alias.• Call ID.

Note: You can add or edit subscriber IDs for theDigital Contacts list. Deleting subscriber IDs can onlybe performed by your dealer.

For the Analog Contacts list, you can only view thesubscriber IDs, edit the subscriber IDs, and initiate aCall Alert. Adding and deleting capabilities can onlybe performed by your dealer.

Making a Group Call from Contacts

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

76

English

Page 78: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 or to the required group alias or ID.

4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

5 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green.

6 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• The Talk Permit Tone.• The PTT Sidetone.

7 Release the PTT button to listen.When any user in the group responds, the LEDblinks green. You see the Group Call icon, thegroup ID, and the user’s ID on your display.

8 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

Making a Private Call from Contacts

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias or ID:

• select the subscriber alias or ID directly

• or to the required subscriber alias or

ID and press to select.• use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual Dial and press

to select.•

or to Radio Number and press to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

77

English

Page 79: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• If there was previously dialed subscriberalias or ID, the alias or ID appears alongwith a blinking cursor. Else, the first line ofthe display shows Radio Number:; thesecond line of the display shows a blinkingcursor. Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID.

Press to select.

4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

5 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe destination alias.

6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

7 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen and the display shows the transmittinguser's ID.

8 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,

indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

The display shows Call Ended.

Making a Phone Call from Contacts

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias or ID:

• select the subscriber alias or ID directly

• or to the required subscriber alias or

ID and press to select.• use the Manual Dial menuA

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

78

English

Page 80: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• or to Manual Dial and press

to select.•

or to Phone Number and press to select.

• The first line of the display shows PhoneNumber: , the second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to

enter a telephone number, and press to select the entered number.

If the entry selected is empty, a negative indicatortone sounds and the display shows Phone CallInvalid # .

When you press PTT button while in the PhoneContacts screen, a negative indicator tone soundsand the display shows Press OK to PlacePhone Call.

4 or to Call Phone and press to

select.

5 If the access code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the first line of the display showsAccess Code: . The second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code

and press to proceed.

During channel access, press to dismiss thecall attempt and a negative indicator tone sounds.Your radio returns to the Call Phone screen.

The access code cannot be more than 10characters.

The first line of the display shows Calling. Thesecond line of the display shows the subscriberalias or ID, and the Phone Call icon.

If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hearthe dialing tone of the telephone user. The first lineof the display shows the subscriber alias or ID,and the RSSI icon. The second line of the displayshows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon.

If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the displayshows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns tothe Access Code input screen. If the access codewas preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

79

English

Page 81: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

returns to the screen you were on prior to initiatingthe call.

6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

7 Do one of the following:

• Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

Note: The RSSI icon disappears duringtransmission.

To enter extra digits, if requested by the PhoneCall, press any keypad key to begin the input ofextra digits. The first line of the display showsExtra Digits: . The second line of thedisplay shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra

digits and press to proceed. The DTMFtone sounds and the radio returns to theprevious screen.

If the call ends while you are entering the extradigits requested by the Phone Call, your radioreturns to the screen you were on prior toinitiating the call.

• Press One Touch Access button.

Note: The DTMF tone sounds.

If the entry for the One Touch Access buttonis empty, a negative indicator tone sounds.

During the call, when you press One TouchAccess button with the deaccess codepreconfigured or enter the deaccess code as theinput for extra digits, your radio attempts to endthe call.

During channel access and access/deaccess codeor extra digits transmission, your radio responds toOn/Off/Volume Control Knob and ChannelSelector Knob only. A tone sounds for everyinvalid input.

8Press to end the call.

9 If deaccess code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code

and press to proceed.The deaccess code cannot be more than 10characters.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

80

English

Page 82: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The DTMF tone sounds and the display showsEnding Phone Call.

If successful, a tone sounds and the display showsPhone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the CallPhone screen.

If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the PhoneCall screen. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 or wait for thetelephone user to end the call.

When the telephone user ends the call, a tonesounds and the display shows Phone CallEnded.

Making a Call Alias Search

You can also use alias or alphanumeric search toretrieve the required subscriber alias.

This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.

Note: Press button or to exit alias search.

If you release the PTT button while the radio is settingup the call, it exits without any indication and returnsto the previous screen.

Your radio may be programmed to perform a radiopresence check prior to setting up the Private Call. Ifthe target radio is not available, you hear a short toneand see negative mini notice on the display. Theradio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radiopresence check.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 Key in the first character of the required alias.A blinking cursor appears.

4 Use the keypad to type the required alias.

Press to move one space to the left. Press to

move one space to the right. Press the keyto delete any unwanted characters. Long press

to change text entry method.The first line of the display shows the charactersyou keyed in. The next lines of the display showthe short listed search results. The alias search is

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

81

English

Page 83: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

case-insensitive. If there are two or more entrieswith the same name, the radio displays the entrythat is listed first in the Contacts list.

5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

6 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe destination alias.

7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

8 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

9 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

The display shows Call Ended.

Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by AliasSearch

You can also use alias or alphanumeric search toretrieve the required subscriber alias.

This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.

Note: Press button or to exit alias search.

If you release the PTT button while the radio is settingup the call, it exits without any indication and returnsto the previous screen.

Your radio may be programmed to perform a radiopresence check prior to setting up the Private Call. Ifthe target radio is not available, you hear a short toneand see Party Not Available on the display; theradio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radiopresence check.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

82

English

Page 84: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

3 Key in the first character of the required alias.A blinking cursor appears.

4 Use the keypad to type the required alias.Press to move one space to the left. Press to

move one space to the right. Press the keyto delete any unwanted characters.The first line of the display shows the charactersyou keyed in. The second line of the displayshows an alias that matches what you have keyedin. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there aretwo or more entries with the same name, the radiodisplays the entry that is listed first in the Contactslist.

5 or to scroll to desired entry, if necessary.

6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

7 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The first linedisplays the target radio’s ID. The second linedisplays the call type and the Call icon.

8 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.

9 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

10 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,you will hear a short alert tone the moment thetarget radio releases the PTT button, indicating thechannel is free for you to respond. Press the PTTbutton to respond.

If there is no voice activity for a programmedperiod of time, the call ends.

You hear a short tone. The display shows CallEnded.

Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key

Note: See Making a Group, Private or All Call withthe Programmable Number Key on page 56 fordetails on making a Group, Private or All Call with theprogrammed number key(s).

1 to access the menu.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

83

English

Page 85: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

4 or to Program Key and press to

select.

5 or to the desired number key and press

to select.

If the number key is currently assigned to anotherentry, the display shows The Key is AlreadyAssigned and then, the first line of the displayshows Overwrite?. Do one of the following.

• or to Yes and press to overwrite

the number key assignment.•

or to No and press to return to theprevious step.

Each entry can be associated to different numberkeys. You see a before each number key that isassigned to an entry. If the is before Empty, thatnumber key is not assigned.

If a number key is assigned to an entry in aparticular mode, this feature is not supported whenyou long press the number key in another mode.

The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

The screen automatically returns to the previousmenu.

Removing the Association between Entry andProgrammable Number Key

1 Access the required alias or ID via:RadioControl

Steps

Programmednumber key

Long press the programmednumber key to the required alias

or ID; press to select.Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

84

English

Page 86: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControl

Steps

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and

press to select. Theentries are alphabeticallysorted.

3 or to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID and

press to select.

2 or to Program Key and press to

select.

3 or to Empty and press to select.

The first line of the display shows Clear fromall keys? .

4 or to Yes and press to select.

Note: When an entry is deleted, the associationbetween the entry and its programmed numberkey(s) is removed.

The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

The screen automatically returns to the previousmenu.

Adding a New Contact

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

3 or to New Contact and press to

select.

4 or to the required contact type, eitherRadio Contact or Phone Contact, and press

to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

85

English

Page 87: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

5 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and

press to confirm.

6 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and

press to confirm.

7 If adding a Radio Contact, or to the

required ringer type and press to select.The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

Setting a Default Contact

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

3 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

4 or to Set as Default and press to

select.

The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

A appears beside the selected default alias orID.

Call Indicator SettingsActivating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert

You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for areceived Call Alert.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

86

English

Page 88: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

4 or to Tones/Alert and press to

select.

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Call Alert and press to

select.

The current tone is indicated by a .

7 or to the required tone and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

appears beside selected tone.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for PrivateCalls

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedPrivate Call.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Private Call and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

87

English

Page 89: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for SelectiveCall

You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for areceived Selective Call.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alert and press to

select.

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Selective Call and press to

select.

The current tone is indicated by a .

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

7 or to the required tone and press to

select. appears beside selected tone.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for TextMessage

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedText Message.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

88

English

Page 90: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Text Message and press to

select.The current tone is indicated by a .

7 or to the required tone and press to

select. appears beside selected tone.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for TelemetryStatus with Text

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedTelemetry Status with Text.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Telemetry and press to select.

The current tone is indicated by a .

7 Do one of the following:

• or to the preferred tone and press

to select. The display shows Tone <Number>Selected and a appears left of the selectedtone.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

89

English

Page 91: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• or to Turn Off and press to

select. The display shows Telemetry RingerOff and a appears left of Turn Off.

Assigning Ring Styles

You can program your radio to sound one of tenpredefined ringing tones when receiving a Call Alertor a Text Message from a particular contact.

The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigatethrough the list.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

4 or to Edit Ringtone and press to

select.

5 or to the required tone and press to

select. appears beside selected tone.

Escalating Alarm Tone Volume

You can program your radio to continually alert youwhen a radio call remains unanswered. This is doneby automatically increasing the alarm tone volumeover time. This feature is known as Escalert.

Call Log FeaturesYour radio keeps track of all recent outgoing,answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call logfeature to view and manage recent calls.

You can perform the following tasks in each of yourcall lists:

• Store ID to Contacts• Delete• View Details

Viewing Recent Calls

The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing.Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

90

English

Page 92: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Call Log and press to select.

3 or to preferred list and press to

select.The display shows the most recent entry at the topof the list.

4 or to view the list.Press the PTT button to start a Private Call withthe current selected alias or ID.

Storing an Alias from a Call List

You can also store an ID without an alias.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Call Log and press to select.

3 or to the required list and press to

select.

4 or to Store and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears. If needed, key in the

alias for that ID and press . The displayshows positive mini notice.

Deleting a Call from a Call List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Call Log and press to select.

3 or to the required list and press to

select.When you select a call list and it contains noentries, the display shows List Empty, andsounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

91

English

Page 93: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page139).

4 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

5 or to Delete Entry? and press to

select.

6 Do one of the following:

•Press to select Yes to delete the entry.The display shows Entry Deleted.

• or to No, and press the button to

return to the previous screen.

Viewing Details from a Call List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Call Log and press to select.

3 or to the required list and press to

select.

4 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

5 or to View Details and press to

select.Display shows details.

Call Alert OperationCall Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radiouser to call you back when they are able to do so.

This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDsonly and is accessible through the menu via Contactsor manual dial.

Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert

When you receive a Call Alert page, you see thenotification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID ofthe calling radio on the display, .

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

92

English

Page 94: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

When you hear a repetitive tone and the LEDblinks yellow, do one of the following:

• Press the PTT button while the display stillshows the Call Alert in the Notification List torespond with a Private Call.

•Press to exit the Notification List. The alertis moved to the Missed Call Log.

See Notification List on page 137 for details aboutthe Notification List.

See Call Log Features on page 90 for detailsabout the Missed Call List.

Making a Call Alert from the Contact List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

3 Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias or ID:

• select the subscriber alias or ID directly

• or to the required subscriber alias or

ID and press to select.• use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual Dial and press

to select.•

or to Radio Number and press to select.

• The first line of the display shows RadioNumber: , the second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Enter thesubscriber ID you want to page and press

.

4 or to Call Alert and press to

select.

The display shows Call Alert and thesubscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alerthas been sent.

The LED lights up solid green when your radio issending the Call Alert.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

93

English

Page 95: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,the display shows negative mini notice.

Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button

Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to make a Call Alert to the predefined aliasor ID.

The display shows Call Alert and thesubscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alerthas been sent.

The LED lights up solid green when your radio issending the Call Alert.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,the display shows negative mini notice.

Emergency OperationAn Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a criticalsituation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at

any time on any screen display even when there isactivity on the current channel.

Your dealer can set the duration of a button press forthe programmed Emergency button, except for longpress, which is similar with all other buttons:

Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75seconds.

Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75seconds.

The Emergency button is assigned with theEmergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer forthe assigned operation of the Emergency button.

Note: If the short press for the Emergency button isassigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then thelong press for the Emergency button is assigned toexit the Emergency mode.

If the long press for the Emergency button isassigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then theshort press for the Emergency button is assigned toexit the Emergency mode.

Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:

• Emergency Alarm.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

94

English

Page 96: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• Emergency Alarm with Call.• Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow.

Note: Only ONE of the Emergency Alarms above canbe assigned to the programmed Emergency button.

In addition, each alarm has the following types:

• Regular – Radio transmits an alarm signal andshows audio and/or visual indicators.

• Silent – Radio transmits an alarm signal withoutany audio or visual indicators. Radio receives callswithout any sound through the radio’s speaker,until you press the PTT button to initiate the call.

• Silent with Voice – Radio transmits an alarmsignal without any audio or visual indicators, butallow incoming calls to sound through the radio’sspeaker.

Receiving an Emergency Alarm

On receiving an emergency alarm the emergencyicon appears, a tone sounds, the LED blinks red andthe radio displays the emergency caller alias. If morethan one alarm has occurred all emergency calleraliases are displayed in an Alarm List.

1 When receiving an emergency alarm, do one ofthe following:

• If a single emergency call alias is displayed,

press to view more details. press again to view your action details.

• If the multiple emergency caller aliases aredisplayed in the Alarm List, or to the

required alias and press to view more

details. Press again to view your actionitems.

2Press and select Yes to exit the Alarm List.

To revisit the Alarm List, press to access themenu and select Alarm List.

Responding to an Emergency Alarm

1 In the Alarm List, or to the required alias.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,you will hear a short alert tone the moment the

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

95

English

Page 97: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is now available for use.

3 Press PTT button to transmit non-emergencyvoice to the same group that the EmergencyAlarm was targeted to.Emergency voice can only be transmitted by theemergency initiating radio. All other radios(including the emergency receiving radio) transmitnon-emergency voice.The LED lights up solid green. Your radio remainsin the Emergency mode.

4 Do one of the following:

• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (ifenabled) and speak clearly into themicrophone.

• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the emergency initiating radio responds, theLED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon,the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on yourdisplay.

6 Your radio displays the Alarm List.

Sending an Emergency Alarm

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm,a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indicationon a group of radios.

If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display anyaudio or visual indicators during Emergency mode.

Press the programmed Emergency On button.

The display shows one of the following:

• Tx Alarm and the destination alias.• Tx Telegram and the destination alias.

The LED lights up solid green and the Emergencyicon appears on the Home screen display.

When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement isreceived, the Emergency tone sounds and theLED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent.

If your radio does not receive an EmergencyAlarm acknowledgement, and after all retries havebeen exhausted, a tone sounds and the displayshows Alarm Failed.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

96

English

Page 98: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode andreturns to the Home screen.

Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarmto a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by aradio within the group, the group of radios cancommunicate over a programmed Emergencychannel.

If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display anyaudio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, orallow any received calls to sound through the radio’sspeaker, until you press the PTT button to initiate thecall.

If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does notdisplay any audio or visual indicators duringEmergency mode, but allow incoming calls to soundthrough the radio’s speaker. The indicators onlyappear once you press the PTT button to initiate, orrespond to, the call.

1 Press the programmed Emergency On button.

The display shows one of the following:

• Tx Alarm and the destination alias.

• Tx Telegram and the destination alias.

The LED lights up solid green and the Emergencyicon appears on the Home screen display.

When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement isreceived, the Emergency tone sounds and theLED blinks green. The display shows AlarmSent.Your radio enters the emergency call modewhen the display shows Emergency and thedestination group alias.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green and the Group iconappears on the display.

4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

• The Talk Permit Tone.• The PTT Sidetone.

5 Release the PTT button to listen. If the Channel Free Indication feature is

enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

97

English

Page 99: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

the transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.

6 Press the PTT button to respond.

7 Once your call ends, press Emergency Off buttonto exit the Emergency mode.The radio returns to the Home screen.

Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarmto a group of radios. Your radio’s microphone isautomatically activated, allowing you to communicatewith the group of radios without pressing the PTTbutton.

This activated microphone state is also known as “hotmic”.

If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled,repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are madefor a programmed duration. During Emergency CycleMode, received calls sound through the radio’sspeaker.

If you press the PTT button during the programmedreceiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicatingthat you should release the PTT button. The radio

ignores the PTT press and remains in Emergencymode.

Note: If you press the PTT button during hot mic, andcontinue to press it after the hot mic duration expires,the radio continues to transmit until you release thePTT button.

If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display anyaudio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, orallow any received calls to sound through the radio’sspeaker, until the programmed hot mic transmissionperiod is over, and you press the PTT button.

If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does notdisplay any audio or visual indicators duringEmergency mode when you are making the call withhot mic, but allow sound through the radio’s speakerwhen the target radio responds after the programmedhot mic transmission period is over. The indicatorsonly appear when you press the PTT button.

Note: If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radiodoes not retry to send the request, and enters the hotmic state directly.

1 Press the programmed Emergency On button.The display shows one of the following:

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

98

English

Page 100: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• Tx Alarm and the destination alias.• Tx Telegram and the destination alias.

The LED lights up solid green and the Emergencyicon is displayed.

2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speakclearly into the microphone.When hot mic has been enabled, the radioautomatically transmits without a PTT button pressuntil the hot mic duration expires. Whiletransmitting, the LED lights up solid green and theEmergency icon appears on the display.

3 The radio automatically stops transmitting whenthe cycling duration between hot mic and receivingcalls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode isenabled.

4 Once the hot mic duration expires, the radioautomatically stops transmitting. To transmitagain, press the PTT button.

Reinitiating an Emergency Mode

Note: This feature is only applicable to the radiosending the Emergency Alarm.

There are two instances where this can happen:

• You change the channel while the radio is inEmergency mode. This exits the Emergencymode. If Emergency Alarm is enabled on this newchannel, the radio reinitiates Emergency.

• You press the programmed Emergency Onbutton during an Emergency initiation/transmissionstate. This causes the radio to exit this state, andto reinitiate Emergency.

Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the EmergencyAlarm

Your radio exits Emergency mode when one of thefollowing occurs:

• Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received(for Emergency Alarm only).

• All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted.• The Emergency Off button is pressed.

Note: If your radio is powered off, it exits theEmergency mode. The radio will not reinitiate theEmergency mode automatically when it is turned onagain.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

99

English

Page 101: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

If you change channels when your radio is inEmergency mode to a channel that has noemergency system configured, No Emergency isshown on your display.

Analog Message Encode Your radio is able to send pre-programmedmessages from the Message list to a radio alias or tothe dispatcher.

Sending MDC Message Encode to Dispatcher

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Message and press to select.

3 or to Quick Text and press to

select.

4 or to the required message. Press to

send.

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds andthe display shows negative mini notice.

Sending 5–Tone Message Encode to Contact

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Message and press to select.

3 or to Quick Text and press to

select.

4 or to the required message. Press to

select.

5 or to the required contact. Press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

100

English

Page 102: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds andthe display shows negative mini notice.

Analog Status Update Your radio is able to send preprogrammed messagesfrom the Status List indicating your current activity toa radio contact (for 5-Tone systems) or to thedispatcher (for MDC systems).

The last acknowledged message is kept at the top ofthe Status List. The other messages are arranged inalphanumeric order.

Sending Status Update to Predefined Contact

1 or to Status and press to select.

2 or to the required status and press to

select.

3 or to Set as Default and press to

select.

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your status update is being sent.

If the status update is acknowledged, a tonesounds and the display shows positive mini notice.A appears beside the acknowledged status.

If the status update is not acknowledged, a lowtone sounds and the display shows negative mininotice. A remains beside the previous status.

For 5-Tone systems, see Setting a Default Contact onpage 86 for details on setting the default contact.

For 5-Tone systems, a PTT button press while in thestatus list sends the selected status update andreturns to the Home screen to initiate a voice call.

Viewing a 5-Tone Status Details

Note: A Software License Key sold separately isrequired to use this feature.

1 or to Status and press to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

101

English

Page 103: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2 or to the required status and press to

select.

3 or to View Details and press to

select.The display shows details of the selected status.

Editing 5–Tone Status Details

1 or to Status and press to select.

2 or to the required status and press to

select.

3 or to Edit and press to select.

4A blinking cursor appears. Press to move one

space to the left. Press to move one space to

the right. Press the key to delete any

unwanted characters. Long press to change

the text entry method. Press once editing iscomplete.The display shows Status Saved and radioreturns to Status List.

Text Message FeaturesYour radio is able to receive data, for example a textmessage, from another radio or an e-mail application.

The maximum length of characters for a textmessage, including the subject line (seen whenreceiving message from an e-mail application), is 140whereas for receiving this is 280 characters.

The radio exits the current screen once the inactivitytimer expires. Any text message in the writing/editingscreen will automatically be saved to the Drafts folder.

Note: For the Arabic language, the text entryorientation is from right to left.

Note: Long press at any time to return to theHome screen.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

102

English

Page 104: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Writing and Sending a Text Message

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Compose and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

3 Use the keypad to type your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entrymethod.

4Press once message is composed.

5 Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-edit, or delete the newly composed message, doone of the following.

• or to Send, and press to send the

message.•

or to Save, and press to save themessage to the Drafts folder.

• to edit the message.

• to choose between deleting the message

or saving it to the Drafts folder.

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

103

English

Page 105: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

If the text message fails to send, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 106.

Sending a Quick Text Message with the One TouchAccess Button

Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to send a predefined Quick Text messageto a predefined alias or ID.

The display shows the transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows the positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows the negative mini notice.

If the text message fails to send, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 106).

Accessing the Drafts Folder

You can save a text message to send it at a latertime.

If a PTT button press or a mode change causes theradio to exit the text message writing/editing screenwhile you are in the process of writing or editing a textmessage, your current text message is automaticallysaved to the Drafts folder.

The most recent saved text message is always addedto the top of the Drafts list.

The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) lastsaved messages. When the folder is full, the nextsaved text message automatically replaces the oldesttext message in the folder.

Note: Long press at any time to return to theHome screen.

Viewing a Saved Text Message

1 Access the Text Message feature.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

104

English

Page 106: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Drafts and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message

1Press again while viewing the message.

2 or to Edit and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

3 Use the keypad to type your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entrymethod.

4Press once message is composed.

5 Select the message recipient by

• or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display shows RadioNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

105

English

Page 107: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved tothe Sent Items folder and marked with a SendFailed icon.

Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Drafts and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

4 or to Delete and press to delete the

text message.

Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages

You can select one of the following options while atthe Resend option screen:

• Resend.• Forward.• Edit.

Note: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital orCapacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not amatch, you can only edit and forward a Fail-to-Sendmessage.

Resending a Text Message

Press to resend the same message to thesame subscriber/group alias or ID.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

106

English

Page 108: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows the positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, the display showsthe negative mini notice.

Forwarding a Text Message

Select Forward to send the message to anothersubscriber/group alias or ID.

1 or to Forward and press to select.

2 Select the message recipient by

• or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display shows RadioNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

Editing a Text Message

Select Edit to edit the message before sending it.

Note: If a subject line is present (for messagesreceived from an e-mail application), you cannot editit.

1 or to Edit and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

2 Use the keypad to edit your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entrymethod.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

107

English

Page 109: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

3Press once message is composed.

4 Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-edit, or delete the newly composed message, doone of the following.

• or to Send, and press to send the

message.•

or to Save, and press to save themessage to the Drafts folder.

• to edit the message.

• to choose between deleting the message

or saving it to the Drafts folder.

5 If you are sending the message, select therecipient by

• or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

• or to Manual Dial, and press to

select. The first line of the display shows RadioNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Text Message:<Subscriber/Group Alias or ID>, confirmingyour message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

Managing Sent Text Messages

Once a message is sent to another radio, it is savedin Sent Items. The most recent sent text message isalways added to the top of the Sent Items list.

The Sent Items folder is capable of storing amaximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When thefolder is full, the next sent text message automaticallyreplaces the oldest text message in the folder.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

108

English

Page 110: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Note: Long press at any time to return to theHome screen.

Viewing a Sent Text Message

1 Access the Text Message feature by performingone of the following actions:Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Sent Items and press to

select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.

The icon at the top right corner of the screenindicates the status of the message (see Sent ItemIcons on page 37).

Sending a Sent Text Message

You can select one of the following options whileviewing a sent text message:

• Resend• Forward• Edit• Delete

Note: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital orCapacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not amatch, you can only edit, forward, or delete a Sentmessage.

1Press again while viewing the message.

2 or to one of the following options and

press to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

109

English

Page 111: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Option Steps

Forward Select Forward to send the selectedtext message to another subscriber/group alias or ID (see Forwarding aText Message on page 107).

Edit Select Edit to edit the selected textmessage before sending it (see Editinga Text Message on page 107).

Delete Select Delete to delete the textmessage.

Resend Select Resend to resend the selectedtext message to the same subscriber/group alias or ID.

The display shows transitional mininotice, confirming that the samemessage is being sent to the sametarget radio.

If the message is sent successfully, atone sounds and the display showspositive mini notice.

Option Steps

If the message cannot be sent, a lowtone sounds and the display showsnegative mini notice.

If the message fails to send, the radioreturns you to the Resend option

screen. Press to resend themessage to the same subscriber/groupalias or ID.

Note: Changing the volume, and

pressing any button, except for ,, or , returns you to the

message.

The radio exits the Resend optionscreen if you press the PTT button toinitiate a Private or Group Call, or torespond to a Group Call. The radioalso exits the screen when it receivesa text or telemetry message, anemergency call or alarm, or a callalert.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

110

English

Page 112: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Option Steps

The display returns to the Resendoption screen if you press the PTTbutton to respond to a Private Call(except when the radio is displayingthe Missed Call screen), and at theend of an All Call.

If you exit the message sending screen while themessage is being sent, the radio updates thestatus of the message in the Sent Items folderwithout providing any indication in the display orvia sound.

If the radio changes mode or powers down beforethe status of the message in Sent Items isupdated, the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and automatically marks itwith a Send Failed icon.

The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-Progress messages at one time. During thisperiod, the radio cannot send any new messageand automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.

Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items

1 Access the Text Message feature by performingone of the following actions:Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Sent Items and press to

select.

When you select Sent Items and it contains notext messages, the display shows List Empty,and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turnedon (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page139).

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

111

English

Page 113: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

3 or to Delete All and press to

select.

4 Choose one of the following.

• or to Yes and press to select. The

display shows positive mini notice.•

or to No and press to return to theprevious screen.

Receiving a Text Message

When your radio receives a message, the displayshows the alias or ID of the sender and the Messageicon.

You can select one of the following options whenreceiving a text message:

• Read.• Read Later.• Delete.

Note: The radio exits the Text Message alert screenand sets up a Private or Group Call to the sender of

the messageif the PTT button is pressed when theradio is displaying the alert screen.

Reading a Text Message

1 or to Read? and press to select.

Selected message in the Inbox opens.

A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.

2 Do one of the following:

•Press to return to the Inbox.

•Press a second time to reply, forward, ordelete the text message.

Managing Received Text Messages

Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. TheInbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30messages.

Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according tothe most recently received.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

112

English

Page 114: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Your radio supports the following options for textmessages:

• Reply• Forward• Delete• Delete All

Note: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital orCapacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not amatch, you can only forward, delete, or delete allReceived messages.

Note: Long press at any time to return to theHome screen.

Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and press to select.

3 or to Inbox and press to select.

4 or to view the messages.

A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to select the current message, and

press again to reply, forward, or deletethat message.

•Long press to return to the Home screen.

Viewing a Telemetry Status Text Message fromthe Inbox

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and press to select.

3 or to Inbox and press to select.

4 or to the required message and press

to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

113

English

Page 115: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status textmessage.The display shows Telemetry: <Status TextMessage>.

5Long press to return to the Home screen.

Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Inbox and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.

4Press once more to access the sub-menu.

5 Do one of the following:

• or to Reply and press to select.

• or to Quick Reply and press to

select.

A blinking cursor appears.

6 Use your keypad to write/edit your message.

7Press once message is composed.

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

114

English

Page 116: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 106).

Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox

1 Access the Text Message feature by performingone of the following actions:Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Inbox and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.

4Press once more to access the sub-menu.

5 or to Delete and press to select.

6 or to Yes and press to select.

The display shows positive mini notice and thescreen returns to the Inbox.

Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox

1 Access the Text Message feature by performingone of the following actions:Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

115

English

Page 117: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Radio Controls Steps

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Inbox and press to select.

When you select Inbox and it contains no textmessages, the display shows List Empty, andsounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page139).

3 or to Delete All and press to

select.

4 or to Yes and press to select.

The display shows positive mini notice.

Job TicketsYour radio is able to receive Job Tickets, which aremessages from the dispatcher listing out tasks thatneed to be performed.

You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort theminto Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are“All", "New", "Started", and "Completed". Check withyour dealer or system administrator for an additional10 folders.

Your radio supports a maximum of 100 Job Tickets,all of which can be seen in the "All" folder. New JobTickets and Job Tickets with recent change in stateare listed first. Upon reaching the maximum numberof Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automaticallyreplaces the last Job Ticket in your radio.

Note: Job Tickets are retained even after radio ispowered down and powered up again.

Your radio will automatically detect and discard theduplicated Job Tickets with the same subject line.

Accessing the Job Ticket Folder

Access the Job Ticket folder.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

116

English

Page 118: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControl

Steps

ProgrammedJob Ticketbutton

1 Press the programmed JobTicket button.

2 or to the required

folder and press toselect.

Note: You can also press

and the correspondingnumber key (1–9) to accessthe required folder.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Job Tickets

and press to select.3 or to the required

folder and press toselect.

RadioControl

Steps

Note: You can also press

and the correspondingnumber key (1–9) to accessthe required folder.

4 or to the required Job

Ticket and press toselect.

Logging In and Out of the Remote Server

This feature allows you to log in and log out of theremote server by using your user ID via the menu.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Log In and press to select.

If you are already logged in, menu displays LogOut.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

117

English

Page 119: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The display shows a transitional mini notice,confirming that you have been logged insuccessfully.

If you have failed to log in, the display shows anegative mini notice.

Creating and Sending a Job Ticket

Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which isbased on a Job Ticket template and send out tasksthat need to be performed.

Note: A CPS programming software is required toconfigure the Job Ticket template. Check with yourdealer or system administrator to determine how yourradio has been programmed.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Job Tickets and press to

select.

3 or to Create Ticket and press to

select.

4 Depending on how your radio is configured, doone of the following:If Then

If your radio isconfigured withone Job Tickettemplate,

1 Use the keypad to type therequired room number and

press to select.2 or to Room Status

and press to select.3 or to the required

option and press toselect.

If your radio isconfigured withmore than oneJob Tickettemplate,

or to the required

option and press toselect.

5 or to Send and press to select.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

118

English

Page 120: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is sent.

If the message is not sent, the display showsnegative mini notice.

Responding to the Job Ticket

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Job Tickets and press to

select.

3 or to the required folder and press to

select.You can also press the corresponding number key(1–9) to access the required folder.

4 or to the required Job Ticket and press

to select.

5Press once more to access the sub-menu.

You can also press the corresponding number key(1–9) to Quick Reply.

6 or to the required Job Ticket and press

to select.You can also press the corresponding number key(1–9) to respond to the job ticket.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour message being sent.

If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the displayshows positive mini notice.

If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and thedisplay shows negative mini notice.

Deleting a Job Ticket

Delete a Job Ticket.RadioControl

Steps

ProgrammedJob Ticketbutton

1 Press the programmed JobTicket button.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

119

English

Page 121: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControl

Steps

2 or to All and press

to select.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Job Tickets

and press to select.3 or to All and press

to select.4 or to the required Job

Ticket and press toselect.

Note: At Step 4, whileviewing the Job Ticket, press

to delete.

RadioControl

Steps

5Press again whileviewing the Job Ticket.

6 or to Delete and

press to select.

Note: You can also press

to delete.

Privacy If enabled, this feature helps to preventeavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channelby the use of a software-based scrambling solution.The signaling and user identification portions of atransmission are not scrambled.

Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channelto send a privacy-enabled transmission, although thisis not a necessary requirement for receiving atransmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel,

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

120

English

Page 122: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled)transmissions.

Your radio supports two types of privacy:

• Basic Privacy.• Enhanced Privacy.

Only one of the privacy types above can be assignedto the radio.

To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or datatransmission, your radio must be programmed tohave the same Privacy Key (for Basic Privacy), or thesame Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy)as the transmitting radio.

If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of adifferent Privacy Key, or a different Key Value andKey ID, you will either hear a garbled transmission(Basic Privacy) or nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy).

The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio isreceiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission.

You can access this feature by performing one of thefollowing actions:

• Pressing the programmed Privacy button totoggle privacy on or off.

• Using the Radio Menu as described by the stepsdescribed next.

Note: Some radio models may not offer this Privacyfeature. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Privacy and press to select.

You can also use or to change selectedoption.

5Press to enable/disable Privacy.

The display shows beside Enabled.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

121

English

Page 123: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF)The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) featureallows the radio to operate in a radio system with aninterface to telephone systems.

1 Press and hold the PTT button to initiate a DTMFcall.

2 Enter the desired number, * or #.You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling allradio tones and alerts (see Turning the RadioTones/Alerts On or Off on page 143).

Multi-Site Controls These features are applicable when your currentradio channel is part of an IP Site Connect or LinkedCapacity Plus configuration.

See IP Site Connect on page 41 and Linked CapacityPlus on page 42 for more details about theseconfigurations.

Starting an Automatic Site Search

Note: The radio only scans for a new site if thecurrent signal is weak or when the radio is unable todetect any signal from the current site. If the RSSIvalue is strong, the radio remains on the current site.

Start Automatic Site search byRadioControls

Steps

Site LockOn/Offbutton

Press the programmed Site LockOn/Off button to toggle the start/stop automatic site search.

Radiomenu

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.4 or to Site Roaming and

press to select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

122

English

Page 124: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControls

Steps

5 or to Site Lock and

press to select.

If the current channel is a multi-site channel withan attached roam list and is out of range, the radioalso performs an automatic site search (site isunlocked) during:

• a PTT button press.• data transmission.

A tone sounds and the display shows SiteUnlocked.

The radio then returns to the Home screen. Thedisplay shows the Site Roaming icon and channelalias.

The LED blinks yellow rapidly when the radio isactively searching for a new site, and turns offonce the radio locks on to a site.

Stopping an Automatic Site Search

When your radio is actively searching for a newsite, you can stop the search byRadioControls

Steps

Site LockOn/Offbutton

Press the programmed Site LockOn/Off button to stop automatic sitesearch.

Radiomenu

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.4 or to Site Roaming and

press to select.5 or to Site Lock and

press to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

123

English

Page 125: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

A tone sounds and the display shows SiteLocked.

The radio then returns to the Home screen. TheLED turns off and the display shows the channelalias.

Starting a Manual Site Search

Start a Manual Site Search byRadioControls

Steps

ManualSite Roambutton

Press the programmed ManualSite Roam button to start themanual site search.

Radiomenu

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.

RadioControls

Steps

4 or to Site Roaming and

press to select.5 or to Active Search

and press to select.

A tone sounds, the display shows Finding Site,and the LED blinks green.

If a new site is found, a tone sounds and the LEDturns off. The display shows Site <Alias>Found.

If there is no available site within range, a tonesounds and the LED turns off. The display showsOut of Range.

If a new site is within range, but the radio is unableto connect to it, a tone sounds and the LED turnsoff. The display shows Channel Busy.

The radio returns to the Home screen.Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

124

English

Page 126: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

SecurityYou can enable or disable any radio in the system.For example, you might want to disable a stolenradio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enablethat radio, when it is recovered.

Note: Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limitedto radios with these functions enabled. Check withyour dealer or system administrator for moreinformation.

Radio Disable

1 Access this feature byRadioControls

Steps

RadioDisablebutton

1 Press the programmed RadioDisable button.

2 or to the required alias or

ID and press to select.

Radiomenu

1 to access the menu.

RadioControls

Steps

2 or to Contacts and press

to select. The entries arealphabetically sorted.

3 Use one of the steps describednext to select the requiredsubscriber alias or ID:

• Select the required alias or IDdirectly.

• or to the required

alias or ID and press to select.

• Use the Manual Dial menu.

• or to Manual Dial

and press to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

125

English

Page 127: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControls

Steps

• or to Radio

Number and press toselect.

• The first line of the displayshows Radio Number: .the second line of thedisplay shows a blinkingcursor. Use the keypad toenter the subscriber alias

or ID and press .4 or to Radio Disable

and press to select.

The display shows Radio Enable: <SubscriberAlias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicatortone and the display shows positive mini notice.

If not successful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone and the display shows negative mininotice.

Do not press during the Radio Disableoperation as you will not get an acknowledgementmessage.

Radio Enable

1 Access this feature byRadioControls

Steps

RadioEnablebutton

1 Press the programmed RadioEnable button.

2 or to the required alias or

ID and press to select.

Radiomenu

1 to access the menu.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

126

English

Page 128: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControls

Steps

2 or to Contacts and press

to select. The entries arealphabetically sorted.

3 Use one of the steps describednext to select the requiredsubscriber alias or ID

• select the required alias or IDdirectly

• or to the required

alias or ID and press to select.

• use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual Dial

and press to select.

RadioControls

Steps

• or to Radio

Number and press toselect.

• The first line of the displayshows Radio Number: .the second line of thedisplay shows a blinkingcursor. Use the keypad toenter the subscriber alias

or ID and press .4 or to Radio Enable and

press to select.

The display shows Radio Enable: <SubscriberAlias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicatortone and the display shows positive mini notice.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

127

English

Page 129: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

If not successful,the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone and the display shows negative mininotice.

Do not press during the Radio Enableoperation as you will not get an acknowledgementmessage.

Lone WorkerThis feature raises an emergency if there is no useractivity, such as any radio button press or activationof the channel selector, for a predefined time.

Before raising the emergency, when the inactivitytimer expires, the radio warns the user via an audioindicator.

If there is still no acknowledgement by the userbefore the predefined reminder timer expires, theradio initiates an Emergency Alarm.

Only one of the following Emergency Alarms can beassigned to this feature:

• Emergency Alarm.• Emergency Alarm with Call.• Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow.

The radio remains in the emergency state allowingvoice messages to proceed until action is taken. See Emergency Operation on page 94 on ways to exitEmergency.

Note: This feature is limited to radios with thisfunction enabled. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.

Password Lock FeaturesIf enabled, this feature only allows you access yourradio if the correct password is entered uponpowering up.

Accessing the Radio from Password

1 Power up your radio.You hear a continuous tone.

2 Do one of the following: Enter your current four-digit password. Press or to edit each digit’s

numeric value. Each digit changes to . Press

to move to next digit. Press to confirm yourselection.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

128

English

Page 130: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• Enter your current four-digit password with theradio’s keypad. The second line of the display

shows . Press to proceed.• Enter your current four-digit password. Press

or to edit each digit’s numeric value.

Each digit changes to . Press to move to

next digit. Press to confirm your selection.

You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit

entered. Press to remove the last on thedisplay. You hear a negative indicator tone, if you

press when the second line of the display isempty, or if you press more than four digits.

If the password is correct, your radio proceeds topower up. See Powering Up the Radio on page22.

If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password. Repeat Steps 1 and 2.

After the third incorrect password, the displayshows Wrong Password and then, shows Radio

Locked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinksyellow.

Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes,and responds to inputs from On/Off/VolumeControl Knob and programmed Backlight buttononly.

Note: The radio is unable to receive any call,including emergency calls, in locked state.

Unlocking the Radio from Locked State

1 If your radio was powered down after being in thelocked state, power up the radio.A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow.The display shows Radio Locked.

2 Wait for 15 minutes.Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for lockedstate when you power up.

3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 in Accessing the Radio fromPassword on page 128.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

129

English

Page 131: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Turning the Password Lock On or Off

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Passwd Lock and press to

select.

5 Enter the four-digit password.See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Passwordon page 128.

6Press to proceed.

If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password, and automatically returns to theprevious menu.

7 If the password entered in the previous step is

correct, press to enable/disable passwordlock.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Changing the Password

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Passwd Lock and press to

select.

5 Enter the four-digit password.See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Passwordon page 128.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

130

English

Page 132: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

6Press to proceed.If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password, and automatically returns to theprevious menu.

7 If the password entered in the previous step is

correct, or to Change Pwd and press to select.

8 Enter a new four-digit password.See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Passwordon page 128.

9 Reenter the previously entered four-digitpassword. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radiofrom Password on page 128.

10Press to proceed.

If the reentered password matches the newpassword entered earlier, the display showsPassword Changed.

If the reentered password does NOT match thenew password entered earlier, the display showsPasswords Do Not Match.

The screen automatically returns to the previousmenu.

Bluetooth OperationNote: If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-relatedfeatures are disabled and the Bluetooth devicedatabase is erased.

This feature allows you to use your radio with aBluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wirelessBluetooth connection. Your radio supports bothMotorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices.

Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed pathbetween your radio and your Bluetooth-enableddevice.

It is not recommended that you leave your radiobehind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device towork with a high degree of reliability when they areseparated.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

131

English

Page 133: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tonequality will start to sound “garbled” or “broken”. Tocorrect this problem, simply position your radio andBluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (withinthe 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establishclear audio reception. Your radio’s Bluetooth functionhas a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-meter/32 feet range.

Your radio can support up to 3 simultaneousBluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enableddevices of unique types. For example, a headset, ascanner, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multipleconnections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of thesame type are not supported.

Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device’suser manual for more details on your Bluetooth-enabled device’s full capabilities.

Turning Bluetooth On and Off

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to My Status and press to select.

The display shows On and Off. The current statusis indicated by a .

4 Do one of the following:

• or to On and press to select. The

display shows On and a appears left of theselected status.

• or to Off and press to select. The

display shows Off and a appears left of theselected status.

Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device

Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or

press during the finding and connectingoperation as this cancels the operation.

1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and placeit in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

132

English

Page 134: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2On your radio, press to access the menu.

3 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

4 or to Devices and press to select.

5 Do one of the following:

• or to the required device and press

to select.• or to Find Devices to locate available

devices. or to the required device and

press to select.

6 or to Connect and press to select.

Display shows Connecting to <Device>. YourBluetooth-enabled device may require additionalsteps to complete the pairing. Refer to respectiveBluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

If successful, the radio display shows <Device>Connected. A tone sounds and appears besidesthe connected device. The Bluetooth Connected iconappears on the status bar.

If unsuccessful, the radio display shows ConnectingFailed.

Note: If pin code is required, use the same entrymethod as Step 2 in Accessing the Radio fromPassword on page 128.

Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device(Discoverable Mode)

Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during thefinding and connecting operation as this may cancelthe operation.

1 Turn Bluetooth On.See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 132.

2 to access the menu.

3 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

133

English

Page 135: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

4 or to Find Me and press to select.

Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-enabled devices for a programmed duration. Thisis called Discoverable Mode.

5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair itwith your radio.Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’suser manual.

Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device

1On your radio, press to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to Disconnect and press to

select.Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>.Your Bluetooth-enabled device may requireadditional steps to disconnect. Refer to respectiveBluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. Apositive indicator tone sounds and disappearsbeside the connected device. The BluetoothConnected icon disappears on the status bar.

Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speakerand Bluetooth Device

You can toggle audio routing between internal radiospeaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.

Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switchbutton.

• A tone sounds and display shows Route Audioto Radio.

• A tone sounds and display shows Route Audioto Bluetooth.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

134

English

Page 136: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Viewing Device Details

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to View Details and press to

select.

Editing Device Name

You can edit the name of available Bluetooth-enableddevices.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to Edit Name and press to select.

6Press to move one space to the left. Press to

move one space to the right. Press to delete

any unwanted characters. Long press tochange text entry method.A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to typethe required zone.

7 The display shows Device Name Saved.

Deleting Device Name

You can remove a disconnected device from the listof Bluetooth-enabled devices.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

135

English

Page 137: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to Delete and press to select.

The display shows Device Deleted.

Bluetooth Mic Gain

Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enableddevice’s microphone gain value.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to BT Mic Gain and press to

select.

4 or to the BT Mic Gain type and the currentvalues.

To edit values, press to select.

5 or to increase or to decrease values and

press to select.

Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode

Note: The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Modecan only be enabled in MOTOTRBO CPS. If enabled,the Bluetooth item will not be displayed in the Menuand you will not be able to use any Bluetoothprogrammable button features.

Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate yourradio, but the devices cannot connect to the radio. Itenables dedicated devices to use your radio positionin the process of Bluetooth-based location.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

136

English

Page 138: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Notification ListYour radio has a Notification List that collects all your“unread” events on the channel, such as unread textmessages, telemetry messages and missed calls.Unread Job Tickets are also stored in the notificationlist.

The Notification icon appears on the status bar whenthe Notification List has one or more events.

For TMS and missed call/call alert notification events,the maximum number are 30 TMS and 10 missedcalls/call alerts. This maximum number depends onindividual feature (job tickets or TMS or missed calls/call alerts) list capability.

Note: After the events are read, they are removedfrom the Notification List.

Accessing the Notification List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Notification and press to

select.

3 or to the required event and press to

select.

Long press to return to the Home Screen.

Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS) ARTS is an analog-only feature designed to informyou when your radio is out-of-range of other ARTS-equipped radios.

ARTS-equipped radios transmit or receive signalsperiodically to confirm that they are within range ofeach other. Your dealer can program your radio totransmit or receive the ARTS signal.

Your radio provides indications of states as follows:

• First-Time Alert – A tone sounds and the displayshows In Range after the channel alias.

• ARTS-in-Range Alert – A tone sounds, ifprogrammed, and the display shows In Rangeafter the channel alias.

• ARTS-Out-of-Range Alert – A tone sounds, theLED rapidly blinks red, and the display alternatesbetween Out of Range and the home screen.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

137

English

Page 139: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP)Your radio can be updated by your dealer remotely,via OTAP, without needing to be physicallyconnected. Additionally, some settings can also beconfigured via OTAP.

While undergoing OTAP, the LED blinks green.

Note: When the radio is receiving high volume data,the High Volume Data icon appears and channel isbusy. A PTT button press at this time may cause anegative tone to sound.

Once the programming is complete, depending onyour radio’s configuration:

• A tone sounds, the display shows UpdatingRestarting, and your radio restarts (powers offand on again).

• Select between Restart Now or Postpone.Selecting Postpone allows your radio to return tothe previous display, with an OTAP Timer iconvisible, for a period of time before the automaticrestart occurs.

Upon power up after the automatic restart occurs, thedisplay shows Sw Update Completed if the OTAP

update is successful or Sw Update Failed if theOTAP update is unsuccessful.

See Software Update on page 171 for your updatedsoftware version.

Utilities

Locking and Unlocking the Keypad

You can lock your radio’s keypad to avoid inadvertentkey entry.

To lock/unlock your radio’s keypad.Option Steps

Locking theKeypad

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

138

English

Page 140: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Option Steps

4 or to Keypad Lock and

press to select.

You can also use or to changethe selected option.

Unlockingthe Keypad Press followed by .

After the keypad is locked, the display showsKeypad Locked and returns to the Home screen.

After the keypad is unlocked, the display showsKeypad Unlocked and returns to the Homescreen.

Turning Keypad Tones On or Off

You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Keypad Tones and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable keypad tones.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Squelch Level

You can adjust your radio's squelch level to filter outunwanted calls with low signal strength or channelsthat have a higher than normal background noise.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

139

English

Page 141: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Normal is the default. Tight filters out (unwanted)calls and/or background noise; however, calls fromremote locations may also be filtered out.

Press the programmed Squelch button to togglesquelch level between normal and tight. Follow theprocedure described next to access this feature viathe radio’s menus.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Squelch and press to select.

5 or to the required setting and press

to select. appears besides selected setting. Screen

returns to the previous menu.

Setting the Power Level

You can customize your radio’s power setting to highor low for each channel.

High enables communication with radios located at aconsiderable distance from you. Low enablescommunication with radios in closer proximity.

Press the programmed Power Level button to toggletransmit power level between high and low. Followthe procedure described next to access this featurevia the radio’s menus.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Power and press to select.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

140

English

Page 142: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

5 or to the required setting and press

to select. appears beside selected setting. At any time,

long press to return to the Home screen.Screen returns to the previous menu.

Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off

A channel can support up to 6 option board features.Refer to your dealer or system administrator for moreinformation.

Press the programmed Option Board Featurebutton to toggle the feature on or off.

Identifying Cable Type

You can select the type of cable your radio uses.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Cable Type and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5 The current cable type is indicated by a .

Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX)Feature On or Off

This feature allows you to initiate a hands-free voiceactivated call on a programmed channel. The radioautomatically transmits, for a programmed period,whenever the microphone on the VOX-capableaccessory detects voice.

Pressing the PTT button during radio operation willdisable VOX. To re-enable VOX, do one of thefollowing:

• Turn the radio off and power it on again.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

141

English

Page 143: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• Change the channel via the Channel SelectorKnob.

• Press the programmed VOX button to toggle thefeature on or off.

• Follow the steps described next to access thisfeature via the radio menu.

If the Talk Permit Tone feature is enabled (see Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page145), use a trigger word to initiate the call. Wait forthe Talk Permit Tone to finish before speaking clearlyinto the microphone.

Note: Turning this feature on or off is limited to radioswith this function enabled. Check with your dealer orsystem administrator for more information.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to VOX and press to select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5Press to disable/enable VOX.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Display Backlight Timer

You can set the the radio’s display backlight timer asneeded. The setting also affects the Menu NavigationButtons and keypad backlighting accordingly.

Press the programmed Backlight button to toggle thebacklight settings, or follow the procedure describednext to access this feature via the radio menu.

The display backlight and keypad backlighting areautomatically turned off if the LED indicator isdisabled (see Turning the LED Indicator On or Off onpage 149).A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

142

English

Page 144: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Display and press to select.

5 or to Backlight Timer and press to

select.

You can use or to change the selectedoption.

Turning the Backlight Auto On or Off

You can enable and disable the radio’s backlight toturn on automatically if needed. If enabled, thebacklight is turned on when the radio receives a call,Notification List event, or Emergency Alarm.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Backlight Auto.

5Press to enable/disable the Backlight Auto.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off

You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) ifneeded.

Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button totoggle all tones on or off, or follow the proceduredescribed next to access this feature via the radiomenu.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

143

English

Page 145: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to All Tones and press to select.

6Press to enable/disable all tones and alerts.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level

You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level ifneeded. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/

alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voicevolume.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Vol. Offset and press to

select.

6 or to the required volume value.The radio sounds a feedback tone with eachcorresponding volume value.

7 Do one of the following:Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

144

English

Page 146: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

•Press to keep the required displayedvolume value.

•Press to exit without changing the currentvolume offset settings.

Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off

You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone ifneeded.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Talk Permit and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable the Talk PermitTone.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off

You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Toneif needed.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

145

English

Page 147: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Power Up and press to select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable the Power Up AlertTone.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Text Message Alert Tone

You can customize your radio’s text message alerttone to Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in theContacts list.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

3 or to the required subscriber alias or ID

and press to select.

4 or to Message Alert and press to

select.The display shows Momentary and Repetitive.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5 or to the required setting and press to

enable. appears besides selected setting.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

146

English

Page 148: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Changing the Display Mode

You can change radio’s display mode between Dayor Night, as needed. This affects the color palette ofthe display.

Change the Display Mode:RadioControl

Steps

ProgrammedDisplay ModeButton

Press the programmed DisplayMode button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio

Settings and press toselect.

4 or to Display and

press to select.

RadioControl

Steps

The display shows Day Modeand Night Mode.

Note: You can also use or

to change the selectedoption.

5 or to the required

setting and press toenable. appears besidesselected setting.

Adjusting the Display Brightness

You can adjust radio’s display brightness as needed.

Note: Display brightness cannot be adjusted when“Auto Brightness” is enabled.

Adjust the Display Brightness

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

147

English

Page 149: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControl

Steps

ProgrammedDisplayBrightnessButton

1 Press the programmedBrightness button.

2 Decrease display brightness

by pressing or increase thedisplay brightness by pressing

. Select from setting of 1 to

8. Press to confirm yourentry.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio

Settings and press toselect.

RadioControl

Steps

4 or to Brightness and

press to select.

The display shows a progressbar.

5 Decrease display brightness

by pressing or increase thedisplay brightness by pressing

. Select from setting of 1 to

8. Press to confirm yourentry.

Language

You can set your radio display to be in your requiredlanguage.

1 to access the menu.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in N

on-C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

148

English

Page 150: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Languages and press to select.

You can also use or to change selectedoption.

5 or to the required language and press

to enable. appears beside selectedlanguage.

Turning the LED Indicator On or Off

You can enable and disable the LED Indicator ifneeded.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to LED Indicator and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5Press to enable/disable the LED Indicator.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off

You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen ifneeded.

1 to access the menu.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

149

English

Page 151: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Display and press to select.

5 or to Intro Screen and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable the IntroductionScreen.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Voice Announcement On or Off

Note: The Voice Announcement feature can only beenabled in MOTOTRBO CPS. If enabled, the Text-to-

Speech feature is automatically disabled, and viceversa.

This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate thecurrent Zone or Channel the user has assigned, orprogrammable button press. This audio indicator canbe customized per customer requirements. This istypically useful when the user is in a difficult conditionto read the content shown on the display.

Toggle Voice Announcement On or Off.Radio Control Steps

ProgrammedVoiceAnnouncementButton

Press the programmed VoiceAnnouncement button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities

and press to select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

150

English

Page 152: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Radio Control Steps

3 or to Radio

Settings and press toselect.

4 or to VoiceAnnouncement and press

to select.

Note: You can also use

or to change the selectedoption.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enableVoice Announcement.The display shows beside Enabled.

•Press to disableVoice Announcement.

Radio Control Steps

The disappears frombeside Enabled.

Setting the Text-to-Speech Feature

Note: The Text-to-Speech feature can only beenabled in MOTOTRBO Customer ProgrammingSoftware. If enabled, the Voice Announcementfeature is automatically disabled, and vice versa.Check with your dealer or system administrator formore information.

This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate thefollowing features:

• Current Channel.• Current Zone.• Programmed button feature on or off.• Content of received text messages.• Content of received Job Tickets.

This audio indicator can be customized per customerrequirements. This is typically useful when the user isin a difficult condition to read the content shown onthe display.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

151

English

Page 153: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Voice Announcement and press

to select.

5 or to any of the following features and

press to select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

• All

• Messages

• Job Tickets

• Channel

• Zone

• Program Button

If enabled, the display shows beside Enabled.

If disabled, the disappears from beside Enabled.

Call Forwarding

You can enable your radio to automatically forwardvoice calls to another radio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Call Forward and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

4 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Call Forwarding. Thedisplay shows beside Enabled.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

152

English

Page 154: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

•Press to disable Call Forwarding. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Menu Timer

Set the period of time your radio stays in the menubefore it automatically switches to the Home screen.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Display and press to select.

5 or to Menu Timer and press to

select.

6 or to the required setting and press

to select.

Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-A)

This feature controls the your radio's microphone gainautomatically while transmitting on an analog system.It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to apreset value in order to provide a consistent level ofaudio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

4 or to Mic AGC-A and press to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

153

English

Page 155: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Mic AGC-A. The displayshows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Mic AGC-A. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)

This feature controls the your radio's microphone gainautomatically while transmitting on a digital system. Itsuppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to apreset value in order to provide a consistent level ofaudio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

4 or to Mic AGC-D and press to select.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Mic AGC-D. The displayshows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Mic AGC-D. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speakerand Wired Accessory

You can toggle audio routing between the internalradio speaker and the speaker of wired accessoryprovided that:

• The wired accessory with speaker is attached.• The audio is not routed to an external Bluetooth-

enabled accessory.

Powering down the radio or detaching the accessoryresets the audio routing to the internal radio speaker.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

154

English

Page 156: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Press the programmed Audio Toggle button totoggle audio routing between the internal radiospeaker and the speaker of wired accessory.

Intelligent Audio

Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volumeto overcome background noise in the environment,inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noisesources. This feature is a Receive-only feature anddoes not affect Transmit audio.

Note: This feature is not applicable during aBluetooth session.

Toggle Intelligent Audio On or Off.RadioControl

Steps

ProgrammedIntelligentAudio Button

Press the programmedIntelligent Audio button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

RadioControl

Steps

2 or to Radio

Settings and press toselect.

3 or to Radio

Settings and press toselect.

4 or to Intelligent

Audio and press toselect.

Note: You can also use or

to change the selectedoption.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enableIntelligent Audio. The

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

155

English

Page 157: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControl

Steps

display shows besideEnabled.

•Press to disableIntelligent Audio. The disappears from besideEnabled.

Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature Onor Off

This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedbackin received calls.

Toggle the Acoustic Feedback SuppressorFeature On or Off by performing one of thefollowing actions:RadioControl

Steps

ProgrammedAcousticFeedback

Press the programmed AcousticFeedback Suppressor button.

RadioControl

Steps

SuppressorButton

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio

Settings and press toselect.

4 or to AF Suppressor

and press to select.

Note: You can also use or

to change the selectedoption.

5 Do one of the following:Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

156

English

Page 158: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControl

Steps

•Press to enableAcoustic FeedbackSuppressor. The displayshows beside Enabled.

•Press to disableAcoustic FeedbackSuppressor. The disappears from besideEnabled.

Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion ControlFeature On or Off

This feature allows you to enable the radio toautomatically monitor the microphone input andadjust the microphone gain value to avoid audioclipping.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

4 or to Mic Distortion and press to

select.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Microphone DynamicDistortion Control. The display shows besideEnabled.

•Press to disable Microphone DynamicDistortion Control. The disappears frombeside Enabled.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

157

English

Page 159: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off

You can enable this feature when you are speaking ina language that contains many words with alveolartrill (rolling “R”) pronunciations. Press theprogrammed Trill Enhancement On/Off button totoggle trill enhancement on or off.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Trill Enhance and press to

select.

5Press to enable/disable Trill Enhancement.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Audio Ambience

You can customize your radio’s audio ambienceaccording to your environment.

Default enables the default factory settings.

Loud enables Noise Suppressor and increasesspeaker loudness for use in noisy surroundings.

Work Group enables AF Suppressor and disablesAGC for use when a group of radios are near to eachother.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Audio Ambience and press to

select.Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

158

English

Page 160: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

5 or to the required setting and press

to select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

appears beside selected setting.Screen returns to the previous menu.

Setting the Audio Profiles

You can customize your radio’s audio profilesaccording to your preference.

Default disables the previously selected audioprofile and the radio’s audio profile returns to normal.

Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 are audio profilesintended to compensate for noise-induced hearingloss that is typical for adults in their 40’s, 50’s, and60’s or over.

Treble Boost, Mid Boost, and Bass Boost are fora tinnier sound, a more nasal sound, and a deepersound.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Audio Profiles and press to

select.

5 or to the required setting and press

to select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

appears beside selected setting.Screen returns to the previous menu.

Turning the Global Positioning System (GPS) On or Off

GPS is a satellite navigation system that determinesthe radio’s precise location. Press the programmedGPS button to toggle the feature on or off.

Note: Selected radio models may offer GPS andGlobal Navigation Satellite System (GNSS).

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

159

English

Page 161: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to GPS and press to select.

5Press to enable/disable GPS.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

See Checking the GPS Information on page 170 fordetails on retrieving GPS information.

Text Entry Configuration

You can configure the following settings for enteringtext on your radio:

• Word Predict• Word Correct

• Sentence Cap• My Words

Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

• Numbers• Symbols• Predictive or Multi-Tap• Language (If programmed)

Note: Press at any time to return to the previous

screen or long press to return to the HomeScreen. The radio exits the current screen once theinactivity timer expires.

Word Predict

Your radio can learn common word sequences thatyou often enter. It then predicts the next word youmay want to use after you enter the first word of acommon word sequence into the text editor.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

160

English

Page 162: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to Word Predict and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Word Predict. The displayshows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Word Predict. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Sentence Cap

Automatically enables capitalization for the first letterin the first word for every new sentence.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to Sentence Cap and press to

select.

6 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Sentence Cap. Thedisplay shows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Sentence Cap. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

161

English

Page 163: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Viewing Custom Words

You can add your own custom words into your radio’sin-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list tocontain these words.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to List of Words and press to

select.Display shows the list of custom words.

Editing Custom Word

You can edit the custom words saved in your radio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to List of Words and press to

select.Display shows the list of custom words.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

162

English

Page 164: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

7 or to the required word and press to

select.

8 or to Edit and press to select.

9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method. Press once your custom word iscompleted.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour custom word is being saved.

If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the custom word is not saved, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

Adding Custom Word

You can add your own custom words into your radio’sin-built dictionary.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to Add New Word and press to

select.Display shows the list of custom words.

7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

163

English

Page 165: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method. Press once your custom word iscompleted.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour custom word is being saved.

If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the custom word is not saved, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

Deleting a Custom Word

You can delete the custom words saved in your radio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to the required word and press to

select.

7 or to Delete and press to select.

8 Choose one of the following.

•At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes.The display shows Entry Deleted.

• or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

164

English

Page 166: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Deleting All Custom Words

You can delete all custom words from your radio’s in-built.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to Delete All and press to

select.

7 Choose one of the following.

•At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes.The display shows Entry Deleted.

• or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Flexible Receive List

Flexible Receive List is a digital-only (currentlysupported in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus)feature that allows you to add, delete or edit memberson the receive talkgroup list. Your radio can support amaximum of 16 members in the list.

Turning the Flexible Receive List On or Off

You can enable and disable the Flexible Receive Listif needed.

Enable the Flexible Receive List by performingone of the following actions:Radio Control Steps

ProgrammedFlexible ReceiveList Button

Press the programmedFlexible Receive List button.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

165

English

Page 167: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Radio Control Steps

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Flexible Rx

List and press toselect.

3Press to enable ordisable the FlexibleReceive List feature.

Previousdisplay

Current display

Turn On Flexible Rx List On

Turn Off Flexible Rx List Off

Adding a New Entry to the Flexible Receive List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Flexible Rx List and press

to select.

5 or to View/Edit List and press to

select.

6 or to Add Member and press to

select.

7 Select the required alias or ID by performing oneof the following actions:RadioControl

Steps

RadioNavigationButtons

or to the required alias orID.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

166

English

Page 168: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControl

Steps

Keypad Key in the first character of therequired alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

Press to move one space to the

left. Press to move one space to

the right. Press the key todelete any unwanted characters.

Long press to change thetext entry method.

The first line of the display showsthe characters you keyed in. Thenext lines of the display show theshort listed search results. Thealias search is case-insensitive. Ifthere are two or more aliases withthe same name, the radio displaysthe alias that is listed first in the list.

8Press to select.The display shows Add Another?.

9 or to No and press to select

The display shows .

Deleting an Entry from the Flexible Receive List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Flexible Rx List and press

to select.

5 or to View/Edit List and press to

select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

167

English

Page 169: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

6 Select the required alias or ID by performing oneof the following actions:RadioControl

Steps

RadioNavigationButtons

or to the required alias orID.

Keypad Key in the first character of therequired alias.

A blinking cursor appears.

Press to move one space to the

left. Press to move one space to

the right. Press the key todelete any unwanted characters.

Long press to change thetext entry method.

The first line of the display showsthe characters you keyed in. Thenext lines of the display show theshort listed search results. The

RadioControl

Steps

alias search is case-insensitive. Ifthere are two or more aliases withthe same name, the radio displaysthe alias that is listed first in the list.

7Press to select.

8 or to Delete and press to select.

9 or to Yes and press to select.

The display shows .

Accessing General Radio Information

Your radio contains information on the following:

• Battery• Radio Alias and ID• Firmware and Codeplug Versions• GPS Information• Software Update

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

168

English

Page 170: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• Site Information

Press at any time to return to the previous

screen or long press to return to the Homescreen. The radio exits the current screen once theinactivity timer expires.

Accessing the Battery Information

Displays information on your radio battery.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Battery Info and press to

select.

The display shows the battery information.

For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display readsRecondition Battery if the battery requiresreconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After thereconditioning process, the display then shows thebattery information.

Checking the Radio Alias and ID

This feature displays the ID of your radio.

Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button tocheck your radio alias and ID. You hear a positiveindicator tone.

Follow the procedure described next to access thisfeature via the radio screen.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to My ID and press to select.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

169

English

Page 171: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The first line of the display shows the radio alias.The second line of the display shows the radio ID.

You can also press the programmed Radio Alias andID button to return to the previous screen.Checking the Firmware Version and CodeplugVersion

Displays the firmware version on your radio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Versions and press to select.

The display shows the current firmware andcodeplug versions.

Checking the GPS Information

Displays the GPS information on your radio, such asvalues of:

• Latitude• Longitude• Altitude• Direction• Velocity• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)• Satellites• Version

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to GPS Info and press to select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

170

English

Page 172: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

5 or to the required item and press to

select.The display shows the requested GPSinformation.

See Turning the Global Positioning System (GPS) Onor Off on page 159 for details on GPS.Software Update

Displays the date and time of the latest softwareupdate carried out via Over-the-Air Programming.

Note: Software Update menu is only available after atleast one successful OTAP session.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to SW Update and press to select.

The display shows the date and time of the latestsoftware update.

See Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) on page 138for details on OTAP session.Site Information

Displays the current Linked Capacity Plus site nameyour radio is on.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Site Info and press to select.

The display shows the current Linked CapacityPlus site name.

See Linked Capacity Plus on page 42 for details onLinked Capacity Plus.

Advanced Features in N

on-Connect P

lus Mode

171

English

Page 173: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Front Panel Programming (FPP)

Your radio is able to customize certain featureparameters to enhance the use of your radio.

Entering FPP Mode

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Program Radio and press to

select.

Long press at any time to return to the Homescreen.

Editing FPP Mode Parameters

Use the following buttons as required while navigatingthrough the feature parameters:

• , – Scroll through options, increase/decrease values, or navigate vertically.

• – Select the option or enter a sub-menu.

• – Short-press to return to previous menu or

to exit the selection screen. Long-press to returnto Home screen.

Checking the RSSI Values

Your radio shows the Received Signal StrengthIndicator (RSSI) icon at the top of your display. Thisfeature allows you to view the RSSI values.

On the home screen, press three times and

immediately press , all within 5 seconds.The display shows current RSSI values. Long

press the to return to the Home Screen.

See Display Icons on page 33 for details on RSSIicon.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Non

-Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

172

English

Page 174: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Connect Plus Operations

Connect P

lus Operations

173

English

Page 175: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Additional Radio Controls in ConnectPlus Mode

Push-To-Talk (PTT) ButtonThe PTT button on the side of the radio ( ) servestwo basic purposes:

A

• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allowsthe radio to transmit to other radios in the call.

Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Releasethe PTT button to listen.

The microphone is activated when the PTT buttonis pressed.

• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button isused to make a new call (see Making a Radio Callon page 189).

If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk PermitTone On or Off on page 145) is enabled, wait until theshort alert tone ends before talking.

Programmable ButtonsYour dealer can program the programmable buttonsas shortcuts to radio functions depending on theduration of a button press:

• Short press – Pressing and releasing rapidly.• Long press – Pressing and holding for the

programmed duration.• Hold down – Keeping the button pressed.

Note: The programmed duration of a button press isapplicable for all assignable radio/utility functions orsettings. See Emergency Operation on page 216 formore information on the programmed duration of theEmergency button.

Assignable Radio Functions

Beacon On/Off Toggles the Beacon feature onor off. Requires purchase of

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

174

English

Page 176: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Connect Plus Man Downfeature.

Beacon Reset Resets (cancels) the Beacontone, but it does not turn theBeacon feature off. Requirespurchase of Connect Plus ManDown feature.

Bluetooth® AudioSwitch

Toggles audio routing betweeninternal radio speaker andexternal Bluetooth-enabledaccessory.

Busy QueueCancellation

Exits the busy mode when anon-Emergency call in theBusy Queue was initiated.Emergency calls, onceaccepted into the Busy Queue,cannot be cancelled.

Call Log Selects the call log list.

Contacts Provides direct access to theContacts list.

Emergency On/Off Depending on theprogramming, initiates orcancels an emergency.

Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on oroff.

Man Down AlarmsOn/Off

Toggles all configured ManDown Alarms on or off.Requires purchase of ConnectPlus Man Down feature.

Man Down AlarmsReset

If pressed while a Man Downfeature Alert Tone is playing,the tone is cancelled andfeature timers are reset, but itdoes not turn the Man DownAlarms off. Requires purchaseof Man Down feature.

Manual Dial Depending on theprogramming, initiates aPrivate or Phone Call bykeying in any subscriber ID orphone number.

One TouchAccess

Directly initiates a predefinedPrivate Call, a Call Alert or aQuick Text message.

Privacy Toggles privacy on or off.

Additional R

adio Controls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

175

English

Page 177: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Radio Check Determines if a radio is activein a system.

Radio Enable Allows a target radio to beremotely enabled.

Radio Disable Allows a target radio to beremotely disabled.

Remote Monitor Turns on the microphone of atarget radio without it givingany indicators.

Roam Request Requests to search for adifferent site.

Scan Toggles scan on or off.

Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radiosearches the current site only.When toggled off, the radiosearches other sites in additionto the current site.

Text Message Selects the text messagemenu.

VoiceAnnouncement forChannel

Plays zone and channelannouncement voicemessages for the current

channel. This function isunavailable when VoiceAnnouncement is disabled.

VoiceAnnouncementOn/Off

Toggles voice announcementon or off.

Zone Allows selection from a list ofzones.

Assignable Settings or Utility Functions

AF Suppressor Toggles the Acoustic FeedbackSuppressor feature on or off.

All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts onor off.

Backlight Toggles display backlight on oroff.

BacklightBrightness

Adjusts the brightness level.

Display Mode Toggles the day/night displaymode on or off.

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

176

English

Page 178: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

GlobalPositioningSystem (GPS)

Toggles the satellite navigationsystem on or off.

Keypad Lock Toggles keypad betweenlocked and unlocked.

Power Level Toggles transmit power levelbetween high and low.

Unassigned Indicates that the buttonfunction has not yet beenassigned.

Identifying Status Indicators in Connect PlusModeDisplay Icons

The 132 x 90 pixels, 256 colors, liquid crystal display(LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries,and menu entries.

The following are icons that appear on the radio’sdisplay. Icons are displayed on the status bar,arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage andare channel specific.

Received Signal Strength Indicator(RSSI)

The number of bars displayedrepresents the radio signal strength.Four bars indicate the strongest signal.This icon is only displayed whilereceiving.

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth feature is enabled butthere is no remote Bluetooth deviceconnected.

Bluetooth Connected

The Bluetooth feature is enabled. Theicon stays lit when a remote Bluetoothdevice is connected.

Notification List has items to review.

or Power Level

Additional R

adio Controls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

177

English

Page 179: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Radio is set at Low power or Radio isset at High power.

Tones Disable

Tones are turned off.

Option Board

The Option Board is enabled.

Option Board Non-Function

The Option Board is disabled.

GPS Available

The GPS feature is enabled. The iconstays lit when a position fix is available.

GPS Not Available/Out of Range

The GPS feature is enabled but is notreceiving data from the satellite.

Scan

Scan feature is enabled.

Emergency

Radio is in Emergency mode.

Secure

The Privacy feature is enabled.

Unsecure

The Privacy feature is disabled.

Site Roaming

The site roaming feature is enabled.

Battery

The number of bars (0 – 4) shownindicates the charge remaining in thebattery. Blinks when the battery is low.

Call Icons

The following icons appear on the radio’s displayduring a call. These icons also appear in the Contactslist to indicate ID type.

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

178

English

Page 180: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Private Call

Indicates a Private Call in progress. Inthe Contacts list, it indicates asubscriber alias (name) or ID(number).

Group Call/Site All Call

Indicates a Group Call or Site All Callin progress. In the Contacts list, itindicates a group alias (name) or ID(number).

Phone Call as Private Call

Indicates a Phone Call as Private Callin progress.

Dispatch Call

The Dispatch Call contact type is usedto send a text message to adispatcher PC through a third-partyText Message Server.

Advanced Menu Icons

The following icons appear beside menu items thatoffer a choice between two options or as an indicationthat there is a sub-menu offering two options.

Checkbox (Empty)

Indicates the option is not selected.

Checkbox (Checked)

Indicates the option is selected.

Solid Black Box

Indicates the option selected for the menuitem with a sub-menu.

Sent Item Icons

The following icons appear at the top right corner ofthe radio’s display in the Sent Items folder.

Additional R

adio Controls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

179

English

Page 181: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

OR

Sent Successfully

The text message is sent successfully.

OR

In-Progress

• The text message to a group alias or IDis pending transmission.

• The text message to a subscriber aliasor ID is pending transmission, followedby waiting for acknowledgement.

Bluetooth Device Icons

The following icons also appear next to items in thelist of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicatethe device type.

Bluetooth Data Device

Bluetooth-enabled data device, suchas a scanner.

Bluetooth Audio Device

Bluetooth-enabled audio device,such as a headset.

Bluetooth PTT Device

Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, suchas a PTT-Only Device (POD).

LED Indicator

The LED indicator ( ) shows the operational status ofyour radio.

A

Add

ition

al R

adio

Con

trols

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

180

English

Page 182: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Blinking red Radio is transmitting at low batterycondition, receiving an emergencytransmission or has failed the self-test upon powering up, or hasmoved out of range if radio isconfigured with Auto-RangeTransponder System.

Rapidlyblinking red

Radio is receiving over-the-air filetransfer (Option Board firmware file,Network Frequency file or OptionBoard Codeplug file) or upgrading toa new Option Board firmware file.

Blinkinggreen andyellow

Radio is receiving a Call Alert,received a text message or Scan isenabled and is receiving activity.

Solid yellow Radio is in Bluetooth DiscoverableMode.

Doubleblinkingyellow

Radio is actively searching for a newsite.

Blinkingyellow

Radio is receiving a Call Alert orScan is enabled and is idle (radio willremain muted to any activity).

Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting.

Blinkinggreen

Radio is powering up, receiving anon-privacy- enabled call or data.

Doubleblinkinggreen

Radio is receiving a privacy-enabledcall.

Indicator Tones

High pitched tone Low pitched tone

Positive Indicator Tone

Negative Indicator Tone

Audio Tones

Audio tones provide you with audible indications ofthe status, or response to data received on the radio.

Continuous Tone A monotone sound.Sounds continuouslyuntil termination.

Additional R

adio Controls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

181

English

Page 183: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Periodic Tone Sounds periodicallydepending on theduration set by the radio.Tone starts, stops, andrepeats itself.

Repetitive Tone A single tone thatrepeats itself until it isterminated by the user.

Momentary Tone Sounds only once for ashort period of timedefined by the radio.

Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-Connect Plus Modes

To switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you mustchange to another zone, if programmed by yourdealer or system administrator. Check with yourdealer or system administrator to see if your radio hasbeen programmed with non-Connect Plus zones, andwhat features are available while operating in non-Connect Plus zones.A

dditi

onal

Rad

io C

ontro

ls in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

182

English

Page 184: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Making and Receiving Calls in ConnectPlus Mode

Selecting a SiteA site provides coverage for a specific area. AConnect Plus site has a site controller and amaximum of 15 repeaters. In a multi-site network, theConnect Plus radio will automatically search for a newsite when the signal level from the current site dropsto an unacceptable level.

Roam Request

A Roam Request tells the radio to search for adifferent site, even if the signal from the current site isacceptable.

If there are no sites available,

• The radio display shows Searching andcontinues to search through the list of sites.

• The radio will return to the previous site, if theprevious site is still available.

Note: This is programmed by your dealer.

Press the programmed Roam Request button.You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switchedto a new site. The display shows Site ID <SiteNumber>.

Site Lock On/Off

When toggled on, the radio searches the current siteonly. When toggled off, the radio searches other sitesin addition to the current site.

Press the programmed Site Lock button.

• You hear a positive indicator tone, indicatingthe radio has locked to the current site. Thedisplay shows Site Locked.

• You hear a negative indicator tone, indicatingthe radio is unlocked. The display shows SiteUnlocked.

Site Restriction

Your Connect Plus radio system administrator has theability to decide which network sites your radio is andis not allowed to use. Your radio does not need to bereprogrammed to change the list of allowed anddisallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at adisallowed site, you see a brief message stating:

Making and R

eceiving Calls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

183

English

Page 185: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Site <number given> Not Allowed. The radiothen searches for a different network site.

Selecting a ZoneThe radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zonecontains a maximum of 16 assignable positions onthe Channel Selector Knob.

Each assignable knob position can be used to startone of the following voice call types:

• Group Call• Multigroup Call• Site All Call• Private Call

1 Access the Zone feature by performing one of thefollowing actions:Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedZone button

Press the programmed Zonebutton.

Radio menu 1 to access the menu.

Radio Controls Steps

2 or to Zone and

press to select.

The current zone is displayed and indicated by a.

2 Select the required zone.Radio Control Steps

or or and scroll to therequired zone.

3Press to select.The display shows <Zone> Selectedmomentarily and returns to the selected zonescreen.

Using Multiple NetworksIf your radio has been programmed to use multipleConnect Plus networks, you can select a differentnetwork by switching to the Connect Plus zone that is

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

184

English

Page 186: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

assigned to the desired network. These network-to-zone assignments are configured by your dealerthrough radio programming.

Selecting a Call TypeUse the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type.This can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, Site AllCall or Private Call, depending on how your radio isprogrammed. If you change the Channel SelectorKnob to a different position (that has a call typeassigned to it), this causes the radio to re-registerwith the Connect Plus site. The radio registers withthe Registration Group ID that has been programmedfor the new Channel Selector Knob position call type.

If you select a position that has no call type assignedto it, your radio sounds a continuous tone and thedisplay shows Unprogrammed. Your radio does notoperate when selected to an unprogrammed channel,use the Channel Selector Knob to select aprogrammed channel instead.

Once the required zone is displayed (if you havemultiple zones in your radio), turn the programmedChannel Selector Knob to select the call type.

Receiving and Responding to a Radio CallOnce the channel, subscriber ID or call type isdisplayed, you can proceed to receive and respond tocalls.

The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and blinks green when the radio isreceiving.

Note: The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and double blinks green when the radiois receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a

Making and R

eceiving Calls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

185

English

Page 187: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the samePrivacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID(programmed by your dealer), as the transmittingradio (the radio you are receiving the call from).

Note: See Privacy on page 240 for more information.

Receiving and Responding to a Group Call

To receive a call from a group of users, your radiomust be configured as part of that group.

When you receive a Group Call (while on the Homescreen), the LED blinks green. The Group Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text lineshows the caller alias. The second text line displaysthe group call alias. Your radio unmutes and theincoming call sounds through the radio's speaker.

1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.The LED lights up solid green.

2 Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.

3 Release the PTT button to listen.

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined periodof time, the call ends.

Note: See Making a Group Call on page 189 fordetails on making a Group Call.

Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

A Private Call is a call from an individual radio toanother individual radio.

When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinksgreen. The Private Call icon appears in the top rightcorner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Yourradio unmutes and the incoming call sounds throughthe radio's speaker.

1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call.The LED lights up solid green.

3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

4 Release the PTT button to listen.Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

186

English

Page 188: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

If there is no voice activity for a predetermined periodof time, the call ends.

You hear a short tone. The display shows CallEnded.

See Making a Private Call on page 190 for details onmaking a Private Call.

Receiving a Site All Call

A Site All Call is a call from an individual radio toevery radio on the site. It is used to make importantannouncements requiring the user’s full attention.

When you receive an Site All Call, a tone sounds andthe LED blinks green.

The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.The first text line shows the caller alias. The secondtext line displays Site All Call. Your radiounmutes and the incoming call sounds through theradio speaker.

Once the Site All Call ends, the radio returns to theprevious screen before receiving the call. A Site AllCall does not wait for a predetermined period of timebefore ending.

You cannot respond to an Site All Call.

Note: See Making a Site All Call on page 191 fordetails on making a Site All Call.

Note: The radio stops receiving the Site All Call if youswitch to a different channel while receiving the call.During a Site All Call, you will not be able to use anyprogrammed button functions until the call ends.

Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call

When you receive an Inbound Private Phone Call, thePhone Call as Private Call icon appears in the topright corner. The first text line shows Phone Call.

1 Press and hold down PTT button to answer andtalk. Release the PTT button to listen.

2Long press to end the call.The first line of the display shows Ending. Thesecond line of the display shows Phone Call....The display returns to the Phone Call screen.

The display shows Phone Call Ended.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

187

English

Page 189: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Making a Buffered Over-Dial in an Inbound PhonePrivate Call

During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text line ofthe display shows Phone Call.

1 Use the keypad to enter the digits and press the

button.

Press followed by within 2 seconds toinsert a pause. The P replaces * and # on thedisplay.The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in thetop right corner. The first text line of the displayshows the entered digits.

2Long press to end the call.

The first line of the display shows Ending. Thesecond line of the display shows Phone Call....The display returns to the Phone Call screen.

The display shows Phone Call Ended.

Making a Live Over-Dial in an Inbound PhonePrivate Call

During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text line ofthe display shows Phone Call.

1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enterthe digits.The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in thetop right corner. The first text line of the displayshows the Live Dial digits.

2Long press to end the call.

The first line of the display shows Ending. Thesecond line of the display shows Phone Call....The display returns to the Phone Call screen.

The display shows Phone Call Ended.

Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call

When you receive an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call,the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.The first text line shows Call1.M

akin

g an

d R

ecei

ving

Cal

ls in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

188

English

Page 190: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.

Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call

When you receive an Inbound Phone Multi-GroupCall, the Group Call icon appears in the top rightcorner. The first text line shows Multigroup Call.The radio unmutes and the incoming multi-group callsounds through the radio's speaker.

Making a Radio CallAfter selecting your channel, you can select asubscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:

• The Channel Selector Knob.• A programmed One Touch Access button – The

One Touch Access feature allows you to make aPrivate Call to a predefined ID easily. This featurecan be assigned to a short or long programmablebutton press. You can ONLY have one IDassigned to a One Touch Access button. Yourradio can have multiple One Touch Accessbuttons programmed.

• The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page208).

• Manual Dial – This method is for Private Calls onlyand is dialed using the keypad (see Making aPrivate Call from Contacts on page 209, and Making a Call with the Programmable Manual DialButton on page 192).

Note: Your radio must have the Privacy featureenabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabledtransmission. Only target radios with the same KeyValue and Key ID as your radio will be able tounscramble the transmission.

Note: See Privacy on page 240 for more information.

Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob

Making a Group Call

To make a call to a group of users, your radio mustbe configured as part of that group.

1 Select the channel with the active group alias orID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 185.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

189

English

Page 191: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The LED lights up solid green. The Group Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the group call alias.

4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen, the radio unmutes and the responsesounds through the radio’s speaker. You see theGroup Call icon, the group alias or ID, andtransmitting radio alias or ID on your display.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. Radio returns to thescreen you were on prior to initiating the call.

Making a Private Call

While you can receive and/or respond to a PrivateCall initiated by an authorized individual radio, yourradio must be programmed for you to initiate a PrivateCall.

You will hear a negative indicator tone, when youmake a Private Call via the Contacts list, Call Log,One Touch Access button, or the Channel SelectorKnob, if this feature is not enabled.

Use the Text Message or Call Alert features tocontact an individual radio. See Text MessageFeatures on page 227 or Call Alert Operation onpage 92 for more information.

1 Do one of the following.

• Select the channel with the active subscriberalias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page185.

• Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Private Callicon appears on the top right corner. The first textline shows the target subscriber alias. The secondtext line displays the call status.

4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

190

English

Page 192: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. You hear a shorttone. The display shows Call Ended.

Your radio may be programmed to perform a radiopresence check prior to setting up the Private Call. Ifthe target radio is not available, you hear a short toneand see negative mini notice on the display.Making a Site All Call

This feature allows you to transmit to all users on thesite that are currently not engaged in another call.Your radio must be programmed to allow you to usethis feature.

Users on the channel/site cannot respond to an SiteAll Call.

1 Select the channel with the active Site All Callgroup alias. See Selecting a Call Type on page185.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The Group Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows Site All Call.

4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

Making a Multi-group Call

This feature allows you to transmit to all users onmultiple groups. Your radio must be programmed toallow you to use this feature.

Note: Users on the groups cannot respond to a Multi-group Call.

1 Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select theMulti-group alias or ID.

2 Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe Multi-group alias or ID.

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

191

English

Page 193: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button

Note: Programmable buttons press must be initiatedfrom the Home screen.

The One Touch Call feature allows you to easilymake a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call aliasor ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or longprogrammable button press.

You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to aOne Touch Call button. Your radio can have multipleOne Touch Call buttons programmed.

1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button tomake a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Callalias or ID.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to make the call.

The LED lights up solid green.

The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.

4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

Making a Call with the Programmable Manual DialButton

Making a Private Call

1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button toenter into the Manual Dial screen.The display shows Number:.

2 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias orPrivate ID.

3 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

4 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Private Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

192

English

Page 194: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.

6 Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. You hear a shorttone. The display shows Call Ended.

Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with theProgrammable Manual Dial Button

1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button toenter into the Manual Dial screen.The display shows Number:.

2 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and

press to place a call to the entered number.

Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press

followed by within 2 seconds to inserta pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.

If successful, the first line of the display showsPhone Call. The second line of the display showsthe dialed telephone number.

If an invalid telephone number is selected, thedisplay shows a negative mini notice, Phone CallFailed, Resource Not Available, or InvalidPermissions.

If is pressed with no telephone numberentered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tonethen a negative indicator tone. The displayremains the same.

3Long press to end the call.

The first line of the display shows Ending. Thesecond line of the display shows Phone Call....

The display shows Phone Call Ended.

Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the PhoneMenu

1 to access the menu.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

193

English

Page 195: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2 or to Phone and press to select.

3Press to select Manual Dial.The first line of the display shows Number, thesecond line of the display shows a blinking cursor.

4 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and

press to place a call to the entered number.

Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press

followed by within 2 seconds to inserta pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.

If successful, the first line of the display showsPhone Call. The second line of the display showsthe dialed telephone number.

If an invalid telephone number is selected, thedisplay shows a negative mini notice, Phone CallFailed, Resource Not Available, or InvalidPermissions.

If is pressed with no telephone numberentered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tonethen a negative indicator tone. The displayremains the same.

5Long press to end the call.

The first line of the display shows Ending. Thesecond line of the display shows Phone Call....

The display shows Phone Call Ended.

Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts

Note: If the Phone Manual Dial is disabled inMOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, thePhone Number item will not be displayed in theMenu.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.M

akin

g an

d R

ecei

ving

Cal

ls in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

194

English

Page 196: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

3 or to Manual Dial and press to

select.

4 or to Phone Number and press to

select.The first line of the display shows Number, thesecond line of the display shows a blinking cursor.

5 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and

press to place a call to the entered number.

If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows anegative mini notice, Press OK to Send andreturns to the previous screen.

Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press

followed by within 2 seconds to inserta pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.

If successful, the first line of the display showsPhone Call. The second line of the display showsthe dialed telephone number.

If is pressed with no telephone numberentered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tonethen a negative indicator tone. The displayremains the same.

6Long press to end the call.

The first line of the display shows Ending. Thesecond line of the display shows Phone Call....

The display shows Phone Call Ended.

Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound PrivatePhone Call

When you make a Private Phone Call, the first line ofthe display shows Phone Call. The second line ofthe display shows the dialed telephone number.

When the call is connected, the Phone Call as PrivateCall icon appears in the top right corner. The first lineof the display shows the telephone number.

If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mininotice, Phone Call Failed, Resource NotAvailable, or Invalid Permissions.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

195

English

Page 197: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Long press to end the call.

The display returns to the previous screen.

Making a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected OutboundPrivate Phone Call

During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text line ofthe display shows the telephone number.

1 Use the keypad to enter the digits.

Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press

followed by within 2 seconds to inserta pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.The first text line of the display shows ExtraDigits, the second text line of the display showsthe entered extra digits.

2Press the button.If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows anegative mini notice, Press OK to Send andreturns to the previous screen.

The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in thetop right corner. The first text line of the displayshows the telephone number with the over-dialdigits appended.

3 Do one of the following.

•Press to return to the Phone Call screen.

•Long press to end the call.

Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected OutboundPrivate Phone Call

During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text line ofthe display shows the telephone number.

1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enterthe digits.The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in thetop right corner. The first text line of the displayshows the telephone number with the over-dialdigits appended.

2Long press to end the call.

Mak

ing

and

Rec

eivi

ng C

alls

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

196

English

Page 198: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The first line of the display shows Ending. Thesecond line of the display shows Phone Call....

The display shows Phone Call Ended.

Making and R

eceiving Calls in C

onnect Plus M

ode

197

English

Page 199: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Advanced Features in Connect PlusMode

Auto FallbackAuto Fallback is a system feature that allows you tocontinue to make and receive non-emergency callson the selected Group Contact in the event of certaintypes of Connect Plus system failures.

If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts toroam to a different Connect Plus site. This searchprocess may result in your radio finding an operableConnect Plus site, or it may result in your radio findinga “Fallback Channel” (if your radio is enabled for AutoFallback). A Fallback Channel is a repeater that isnormally part of an operable Connect Plus site, but iscurrently unable to communicate with either its sitecontroller or the Connect Plus network. In Fallbackmode, the repeater operates as a single digitalrepeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports non-emergency Group Calls only. No other call types aresupported in Fallback Mode.

Indications of Auto Fallback Mode

When your radio is using a Fallback channel, youhear the intermittent “Fallback Tone” approximatelyonce every 15 seconds (except while transmitting).The display periodically shows a brief message,“Fallback Channel”. Your radio only permits PTT onthe selected Group Contact (Group Call, MultigroupCall, or Site All Call). It does not allow you to makeother types of calls.

Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode

Note: Calls are heard only by radios that aremonitoring the same Fallback channel and selectedto the same Group. Calls are not networked to othersites or other repeaters.

Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alerts are notavailable in Fallback mode. If you press theemergency button in Fallback mode, the radioprovides an invalid key press tone. Display-equippedradios also show the message, “Feature notavailable”.

Private (radio to radio) and Phone calls are notavailable in Fallback mode. If you attempt a call to aprivate contact, you will receive a denial tone. At this

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

198

English

Page 200: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

point you should select a desired group contact.Other non-supported calls include Remote Monitor,Call Alert, Radio Check, Radio Enable, RadioDisable, Text messaging, Location Updates, andpacket data calls.

Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is notsupported in Auto Fallback mode. If two or more radiousers press PTT at the same time (or at almost thesame time), it is possible that both radios transmituntil PTT is released. In this event, it is possible thatnone of the transmissions will be understood byreceiving radios.

Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normalfunctioning. Simply select the group contact you wishto use (using the radio’s normal channel selectionmethod), and then press the PTT to start your call. Itis possible that the channel may be in use already byanother group. If the channel is in use, you receive abusy tone and the display will say “Channel Busy”.You may select Group, Multi-group or Site All Callcontacts using your radio’s normal channel selectionmethod. While the radio is operating on the FallbackChannel, the Multigroup operates just like otherGroups. It is only heard by radios that are currentlyselected to the same Multi-group.

Returning to Normal Operation

If the site returns to normal trunking operation whileyou are in range of your Fallback repeater, your radioautomatically exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear aregistration “beep” when the radio successfullyregisters. If you are in the range of an operable site(that is not in Fallback mode), you may press theRoam Request button (if programmed for your radio)to force your radio to search for and register on anavailable site. If no other site is available, your radioreturns to Auto Fallback mode after searching iscomplete. If you drive out of coverage of yourFallback repeater, your radio enters Search mode(display indicates “Searching”).

Radio CheckIf enabled, this feature allows you to determine ifanother radio is active in a system without disturbingthe user of that radio. No audible or visual notificationis shown on the target radio.

This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliasesor IDs.

Sending a Radio Check

1 Access the Radio Check feature.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

199

English

Page 201: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControl

Steps

ProgrammedRadio Checkbutton

1 Press the programmed RadioCheck button.

2 or to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID and

press to select.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and

press to select.3 or to the required

subscriber alias or ID and

press to select.4 or to Radio Check

and press to select.

The display shows the Target Alias, indicating therequest is in progress. The LED lights up solidgreen.

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

If the target radio is active in the system, a tonesounds and the display briefly shows TargetRadio Available.

If the target radio is not active in the system, atone sounds and the display briefly shows TargetRadio Not Available.

Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screenwhen initiated via Menu.

Radio returns to the Home Screen if initiated viathe programmable button.

Remote MonitorUse the Remote Monitor feature to turn on themicrophone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDsonly). The green LED will blink once on the targetsubscriber. You can use this feature to monitor,remotely, any audible activity surrounding the targetradio.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

200

English

Page 202: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Your radio must be programmed to allow you to usethis feature.

Initiating Remote Monitor

Note: Remote Monitor automatically stops after aprogrammed duration or when there is any attempt toinitiate transmission, change channels or power downthe radio.

1 Access the Remote Monitor feature.RadioControl

Steps

ProgrammedRemoteMonitorButton

1 Press the programmedRemote Monitor button.

2 or to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID and

press to select.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and

press to select.

RadioControl

Steps

3 or to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID and

press to select.4 or to Manual Dial

and press to select.5 or to Remote Mon.

and press to select.

The first text line shows Rem. Monitor. Thesecond text line displays the Target Alias,indicating the request is in progress. The LEDlights up blinking green.

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds andthe display momentarily shows Rem. MonitorSuccessful. Your radio starts playing audio fromthe monitored radio for a programmed durationand display shows Rem. Monitor, followed by

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

201

English

Page 203: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

target alias. Once the timer expires, the radiosounds an alert tone and the LED turns off.

If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone the display shows Rem. MonitorFailed.

ScanThis feature allows your radio to monitor and join callsfor groups defined in a pre-programmed scan list.When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on thestatus bar and the LED blinks yellow when idle.

Starting and Stopping Scan

Note: This procedure turns the Scan feature On orOff for all Connect Plus zones with the same NetworkID as your currently selected zone. It is important tonote that even when the Scan feature is turned on viathis procedure, scan may still be disabled for some(or all) groups on your scan list. See Editing the ScanList on page 204 for more information.

You can start and stop scanning by pressing theprogrammed Scan button OR follow the proceduredescribed next.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Turn On or Turn Off and press

to select.

• The display shows Scan On if scan is enabled.• The Scan menu shows Turn Off if scan is

enabled.• The display shows Scan Off if scan is

disabled.• The Scan menu shows Turn On if scan is

disabled.

Responding to a Transmission During a Scan

During scanning, your radio stops on a group whereactivity is detected. The radio continuously listens forany member in the scan list when idle on the controlchannel.

1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

202

English

Page 204: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2 Press the PTT button during hang time.The LED lights up solid green.

3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

4 Release the PTT button to listen.If you do not respond within the hang time, theradio returns to scanning other groups.

User Configurable ScanIf the Edit List menu is enabled, a user is able to Addand Remove the scan members from the AddMember menu. A Scan List member must be aregular Group Contact (i.e. not Multi-group or Site AllCall/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assignedto a Channel Selector position in a Connect PlusZone with the same Network ID as the currentlyselected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not matchany Talkgroup that has been included in the currentZone's Scan List.

Scan can be turned on or off from the menu or bypressing a programmed Scan On/Off button.

This feature functions only when the radio is notcurrently involved in a call. If you are presentlylistening to a call, your radio cannot scan for othergroup calls, and is therefore unaware they are inprogress. Once your call is finished, your radioreturns to the control channel time slot and is able toscan for groups that are in the scan list.

Turning Scan On or OffNote: This procedure turns the Scan feature On orOff for all zones with the same Network ID as yourcurrently selected zone. It is important to note thateven when the Scan feature is turned on via thisprocedure, scan may still be disabled for some (or all)groups on your scan list. See the next section formore information.

If Scan is turned on, the Scan icon appears on yourdisplay. When Scan is on and you are notparticipating in a call, the LED blinks green andyellow.

The procedure for turning Scan on or off depends onhow your radio is programmed. If programmed with aScan On/Off button, use the button to toggle thefeature on or off. If your radio has been programmed

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

203

English

Page 205: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

so that Scan can be turned on or off via the menu,follow the procedure described next.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan and press to select.

3 or to Turn On or Turn Off and press

to select.

• The display shows Scan On momentarily ifscan is disabled.

• The display shows Scan Off momentarily ifscan is enabled.

Editing the Scan ListNote: If the scan list entry happens to be the radio’scurrently selected group, the radio listens for activityon this group regardless of whether the list entrycurrently shows a check mark or not. Whenever aradio is not in a call, the radio listens for activity on itsSelected Group, Multigroup, the Site All Call, and itsDefault Emergency Revert Group (if configured for

one). This operation cannot be disabled. If Scan isenabled the radio will also listen for activity onenabled Zone Scan List members.

Your scan list determines which groups can bescanned. The list is created when your radio isprogrammed. If your radio has been programmed toallow you to edit the scan list, you can,

• Enable/disable scan for individual groups on thelist.

• Add and Remove the scan members from the AddMember menu. Refer to Add or Delete a Group viathe Add Members Menu on page 205.

Note: A Scan List member must be a regular GroupContact (i.e. not Multigroup or Site All Call/NetworkWide All Call) that is currently assigned to a ChannelSelector position in a Connect Plus Zone with thesame Network ID as the currently selected Zone.

The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroupthat has been included in the current Zone's ScanList.

1 to access the menu.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

204

English

Page 206: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2 or to View/Edit List and press to

select.

3 or to the desired Group name.

If a check mark precedes the Group name, thenscan is currently enabled for this Group.

If there is no check mark preceding the Groupname, then scan is currently disabled for thisGroup.

4 to select the desired Group.

The display shows Enable if scan is currentlydisabled for the Group.

The display shows Disable if scan is currentlyenabled for the Group.

5 Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable)

and press to select.Depending on which option was selected, theradio momentarily displays Scan Enabled or ScanDisabled as confirmation.

The radio displays the Zone scan list again. If scanwas enabled for the Group, the check mark displaysbefore the Group name. If scan was disabled for theGroup, the check mark is removed before the Groupname.

Add or Delete a Group via the Add MembersMenu

The Connect Plus radio does not allow a duplicategroup number or a duplicate group alias to be placedon a zone scan list (or to be shown as a “scancandidate”). Thus, the list of “scan candidates”described in steps 6 and 7 sometimes changes afteradding or deleting a group from the zone scan list.

If your radio has been programmed to allow you toedit the scan list, you can use the Add Membersmenu to add a group to the scan list of the currentlyselected zone, or to delete a group from the san list ofthe currently selected zone.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Scan option and press to select.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

205

English

Page 207: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

3 or to <Add Members> and press to

select.The display shows “Add Members from Zone n” (n= the Connect Plus zone number of the firstConnect Plus zone in your radio with the sameNetwork ID as your currently selected zone).

4 Do one of the following.

• If the group you want to add to the scan list isassigned to a channel selector position in thatzone, go to step 6.

• If the group you want to add to the scan list isassigned to a channel selector position in adifferent Connect Plus zone, go to step 5.

5 or to scroll a list of Connect Plus zonesthat have the same Network ID as the currentlyselected zone.

6 After locating the Connect Plus zone where thedesired group is assigned to a channel selector

position, press to select.

Your radio displays the first entry in a list of groupsassigned to a channel position in that zone. The

groups on the list are called “scan candidates”,because they can be added to the scan list of yourcurrently selected zone (or they are already on thezone scan list).

If the zone does not have any groups that can beadded to the scan list, the radio displays NoCandidates.

7 or to scroll through the list of candidategroups.

If a plus sign (+) is displayed immediately beforethe group alias, this indicates the group iscurrently on the scan list for the selected zone.

If the plus sign (+) is not displayed immediatelybefore the alias, the group is not currently on thescan list, but can be added.

8Press when the desired group alias isdisplayed.

If this group is not currently on the scan list for thecurrently selected zone, the Add (Group Alias)message is displayed.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

206

English

Page 208: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

If this group is already on the scan list for thecurrently selected zone, the Delete (Group Alias)message is displayed.

9Press to accept the displayed message (Addor Delete).

If deleting a group from the list, you will know theoperation is successful because the plus sign (+)will no longer display immediately before the alias.

If adding a group to the list, you will know theoperation is successful because the plus sign (+)will display before the alias.

If you are attempting to add a group, and the list isalready full, the radio displays List Full. If thisshould occur, it will be necessary to delete a groupfrom the scan list prior to adding a new one.

10When finished, press as many times asnecessary to return to the desired menu.

Understanding Scan OperationNote: If the Radio joins a call for a Zone Scan Listmember from a different Zone and Call Hang Timerexpires before you are able to respond, in order torespond, you must navigate to the Zone and Channelof the Scan List Member and start a new call.

There are some circumstances in which you can misscalls for groups that are in your scan list. When youmiss a call for one of the following reasons, this doesnot indicate a problem with your radio. This is anormal scan operation for Connect Plus.

• Scan feature is not turned on (check for the scanicon on the display).

• Scan list member has been disabled via the menu(see Editing the Scan List on page 204).

• You are participating in a call already.• No member of the scanned group is registered at

your site (Multisite systems only).

Scan TalkbackIf your radio scans into a call from the selectablegroup scan list, and if the PTT button is pressedduring the scanned call, the operation of the radio

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

207

English

Page 209: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

depends on whether Scan Talkback was enabled ordisabled during radio programming. For moreinformation on how your radio is programmed,contact your radio dealer (or your radio systemadministrator).

ScanTalkbackDisabled

The radio leaves the scanned call andattempts to transmit on the contact forthe currently selected channelposition. After the Call Hang Time onthe currently selected contact expires,the radio returns to the home channeland starts the Scan Hang Time Timer.The radio resumes group scan after itsScan Hang Time Timer expires.

ScanTalkbackEnabled

If the PTT button is pressed during theGroup Hang Time of the scanned call,the radio attempts to transmit to thescanned group.

Note: If you scan into a call for a group that is notassigned to a channel position in the currentlyselected zone and you miss the Hang Time of thecall, switch to the proper zone and then select thechannel position of the group to talk back to thatgroup.

Contacts SettingsNote: You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for ConnectPlus Contacts. Deleting subscriber IDs can only beperformed by your dealer.

If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, youcan make a privacy-enabled voice call on thatchannel. Only target radios with the same PrivacyKey OR the same Key Value and Key ID as yourradio are able to unscramble the transmission.

Contacts provide “address-book” capabilities on yourradio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID thatyou use to initiate a call.

Each zone provides a Contact List with up to 100contacts. The following contact types are available:

• Private Call• Group Call• Multigroup Call• Site All Call Voice• Site All Call Text• Dispatch CallA

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

208

English

Page 210: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a textmessage to a dispatcher PC through a third-partyText Message Server.

Making a Private Call from Contacts

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias:

• Select the subscriber alias directly.

• or to the required subscriber alias orID.

• Use the Manual Dial menu.

• or to Manual Dial and press

to select.• If there was previously dialed subscriber

alias or ID, the alias or ID appears along

with a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to

edit/enter the ID. Press to select.

4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

5 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe destination alias.

6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

7 Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen and the display shows the transmittinguser's ID.

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

You hear a short tone. The display shows CallEnded.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

209

English

Page 211: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Making a Call Alias Search

You can also use alias or alphanumeric search toretrieve the required subscriber alias.

This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

The entries are alphabetically sorted.

3 Key in the first character of the required alias, andthen press or to locate the required alias.

4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

5 Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe destination alias.

6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.

7 Release the PTT button to listen.

When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.

If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.

The display shows Call Ended.

Adding a New Contact

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

3 or to New Contact and press to

select.

4 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and

press to confirm.

5 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and

press to confirm.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

210

English

Page 212: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

6 If adding a Radio Contact, or to the

required ringer type and press to select.The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows Contact Saved.

Call Indicator SettingsActivating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert

You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for areceived Call Alert.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alert and press to

select.

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Call Alert and press to

select.

The current tone is indicated by a .

7 or to the required tone and press to

select.

appears beside selected tone.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for PrivateCalls

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedPrivate Call.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

211

English

Page 213: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Private Call and press to

select.

Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for TextMessage

You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedText Message.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Call Ringers and press to

select.

6 or to Text Message and press to

select.The current tone is indicated by a .

7 or to the required tone and press to

select. appears beside selected tone.

Escalating Alarm Tone Volume

You can program your radio to continually alert youwhen a radio call remains unanswered. This is done

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

212

English

Page 214: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

by automatically increasing the alarm tone volumeover time. This feature is known as Escalert.

Call Log FeaturesYour radio keeps track of all recent outgoing,answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call logfeature to view and manage recent calls.

You can perform the following tasks in each of yourcall lists:

• Delete• View Details

Viewing Recent Calls

The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Call Log and press to select.

3 or to preferred list and press to

select.

The display shows the most recent entry at the topof the list.

4 or to view the list.Press the PTT button to start a Private Call withthe current selected alias or ID.

Deleting a Call from a Call List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Call Log and press to select.

3 or to the required list and press to

select.When you select a call list and it contains noentries, the display shows List Empty, andsounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page139).

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

213

English

Page 215: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

4 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

5 or to Delete and press to select.

6 Do one of the following:

•Press to select Yes to delete the entry.The display shows Entry Deleted.

• or to No, and press the button to

return to the previous screen.

Viewing Details from a Call List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Call Log and press to select.

3 or to the required list and press to

select.

4 or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.

5 or to View Details and press to

select.Display shows details.

Call Alert OperationCall Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radiouser to call you back when they are able to do so.

This feature is accessible through the menu viaContacts, manual dial or a programmed One TouchAccess button.

Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert

When you receive a Call Alert page, you see thenotification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID ofthe calling radio on the display.

When you hear a repetitive tone and the LEDblinks yellow, do one of the following:A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

214

English

Page 216: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• Press the PTT button while the display stillshows the Call Alert in the Notification List torespond with a Private Call.

•Press to exit the Notification List. The alertis moved to the Missed Call Log.

See Notification List on page 253 for details aboutthe Notification List.

See Call Log Features on page 213 for detailsabout the Missed Call List.

Making a Call Alert from the Contact List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press to select.

3 Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias or ID:

• select the subscriber alias directly

• or to the required subscriber alias

and press to select.

• use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual Dial and press

to select.• The Manual Dial text entry screen shall be

displayed. Enter the Subscriber ID and

press .

4 or to Call Alert and press to

select.

The display shows Call Alert: <SubscriberAlias or ID>Call Alert and the subscriberalias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has beensent.

The LED lights up solid green when your radio issending the Call Alert.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, thedisplay shows Call Alert Successful.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,the display shows Call Alert Failed.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

215

English

Page 217: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button

Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias.The display shows Call Alert and thesubscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alerthas been sent.

The LED lights up solid green when your radio issending the Call Alert.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, thedisplay shows Call Alert Successful.

If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,the display shows Call Alert Failed.

Emergency OperationNote: If your radio is programmed for “Silent” or“Silent with voice” emergency initiation, in most casesit automatically exits silent operation after theEmergency Call or Emergency Alert is finished. Theexception to this rule is when “Emergency Alert” is theconfigured Emergency Mode and “Silent” is theconfigured Emergency Type. If your radio isprogrammed in this manner, the silent operationcontinues until you cancel silent operation by

pressing PTT or the button configured for“Emergency Off”.

Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alerts are notsupported when operating in Connect Plus AutoFallback mode. For more information see the AutoFallback on page 198.

An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a criticalsituation. You can initiate an Emergency at any timeon any screen display, even when there is activity onthe current channel. Pressing the Emergency buttoninitiates the programmed Emergency mode. Theprogrammed Emergency mode may also be initiatedby triggering the optional Man Down feature. TheEmergency feature may be disabled in your radio.

Your dealer can set the duration of a button press forthe programmed Emergency button, except for longpress, which is similar with all other buttons:

Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75seconds.

Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75seconds.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

216

English

Page 218: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The Emergency button is assigned with theEmergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer forthe assigned operation of the Emergency button.

• If the short press for the Emergency button isassigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then thelong press for the Emergency button is assignedto exit the Emergency mode.

• If the long press for the Emergency button isassigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then theshort press for the Emergency button is assignedto exit the Emergency mode.

When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone,it supports three Emergency modes:

• Emergency Call – You must press the PTT buttonto talk on the assigned emergency time slot.

• Emergency Call with Voice to Follow – For thefirst transmission on the assigned emergency timeslot, the microphone is automatically unmuted andyou may talk without pressing the PTT button. Themicrophone stays “hot” in this fashion for a timeperiod programmed into the radio. For subsequenttransmissions in the same Emergency call, youmust press the PTT button.

• Emergency Alert – An Emergency Alert is not avoice call. It is an emergency notification that is

sent to radios that are configured to receive thesealerts. The radio sends an emergency alert via thecontrol channel of the currently registered site.The Emergency Alert is received by radios in theConnect Plus network that are programmed toreceive them (no matter which network site theyare registered to).

Only ONE of the Emergency Modes can be assignedto the Emergency button per zone. In addition, eachEmergency mode has the following types:

• Regular – Radio initiates an Emergency andshows audio and/or visual indicators.

• Silent – Radio initiates an Emergency without anyaudio or visual indicators. The radio will suppressall audio or visual indications of the Emergencyuntil you press the PTT button to start a voicetransmission.

• Silent with Voice – The same as Silent operation,except that the radio will also unmute for somevoice transmissions.

Receiving an Incoming Emergency

Your radio may be programmed to sound an alerttone and also display information about the incomingEmergency. If so programmed, upon receiving the

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

217

English

Page 219: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

incoming Emergency, the display shows theEmergency Details screen with the emergency icon,the Alias or ID of the radio that requested theEmergency, the Group Contact being used for theEmergency, and one additional line of information.The additional information is the name of the zonethat contains the Group Contact.

At the present time, the radio displays only the mostrecently decoded Emergency. If a new Emergency isreceived before the prior Emergency is cleared, thedetails for the new Emergency replace the details ofthe previous Emergency.

Depending on how your radio has been programmed,the Emergency Details screen (or Alarm List screen)will stay on your radio’s display even after theEmergency ends. You can save the emergencydetails to the Alarm List, or you can delete theemergency details as described in the followingsections.

Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List

Saving the emergency details to the Alarm List allowsyou to view the details again at a later time byselecting Alarm List from the Main Menu.

1 While the Emergency Details (or Alarm List)

screen is displayed, press .The Exit Alarm List screen displays.

2 Perform one of the following actions:

•Select Yes and press to save theemergency details to the Alarm List, and to exitthe Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.

•Select No and press to return to theEmergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.

Deleting the Emergency Details

1 While the Emergency Details screen is displayed,

press .The Delete screen displays.

2 Perform one of the following actions:

•Select Yes and press to delete theemergency details.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

218

English

Page 220: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

•Select No and press to return to theEmergency Details screen.

Responding to an Emergency Call

Note: If you do not respond to the Emergency Callwithin the time allotted for the Emergency Call HangTime, the Emergency call will end. If you want tospeak to the group after the Emergency Call HangTime expires, you must first select the channelposition assigned to the group (if not alreadyselected). Then, press PTT to start a non-EmergencyCall to the group.

1 When receiving an Emergency Call, press anybutton to stop all Emergency Call receivedindications.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voicetransmission on the Emergency group.All radios that are monitoring this group hear yourtransmission.

4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.The LED lights up green.

5 Release the PTT button to listen.When the emergency initiating radio responds, theLED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon,the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on yourdisplay.

Responding to an Emergency Alert

Note: The Group contact used for the EmergencyAlert should not be used for voice communication.This could prevent other radios from sending andreceiving Emergency Alerts on the same group.

An Emergency Alert from a radio indicates that theuser is in an urgent situation. You may respond to thealert by initiating a private call to the radio whodeclared the emergency, initiating a group call to adesignated talk group, sending the radio a Call Alert,initiating a Remote Monitor of that radio, etc. Theproper response is determined by your organizationand the individual situation.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

219

English

Page 221: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Initiating an Emergency Call

Note: If your radio is set to Silent, it does not displayany audio or visual indicators during Emergencymode until you press the PTT button to initiate a voicetransmission.

If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does notinitially display any audio or visual indicators that theradio is in Emergency mode. However, your radiounmutes for the transmissions of radios responding toyour emergency. The emergency indicators onlyappear once you press the PTT button to initiate avoice transmission from your radio.

For both “Silent” and “Silent with Voice” operation, theradio automatically exits silent operation after theEmergency Call is finished.

1 Press the programmed Emergency button.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.

3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voicetransmission on the Emergency group.

When you release the PTT button, the Emergencycall continues for the time allotted for theEmergency Call Hang Time.

If you press the PTT button during this time, theEmergency call continues.

Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow

Your radio must be programmed for this type ofoperation.

When enabled for this operation, when you press theprogrammed Emergency button, and when yourradio receives the time slot assignment, themicrophone is automatically activated withoutpressing the PTT button. This activated microphonestate is also known as “hot mic”. The “hot mic” appliesto the first voice transmission from your radio duringthe Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions inthe same Emergency call, you must press the PTTbutton.

1 Press the programmed Emergency button.

2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

220

English

Page 222: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

3 The microphone remains active for the “hot mic”time specified in your radio's codeplugprogramming.During this time, the LED lights up green.

4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer thanthe programmed duration.

Initiating an Emergency Alert

Note: If your radio is programmed for “Silent” or“Silent with Voice”, it will not provide any audio orvisual indications that it is sending an EmergencyAlert. If programmed for “Silent”, the silent operationcontinues indefinitely until you press PTT or thebutton configured for “Emergency Off”. If programmedfor “Silent with Voice”, the radio automatically cancelssilent operation when the site controller broadcaststhe Emergency Alert.

Press the orange Emergency button.

Upon transmitting the Emergency Alert to the sitecontroller, the radio’s display shows theEmergency icon, the Group contact used for theEmergency Alert, and TX Alarm.

Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sentand is being broadcast for other radios to hear, apositive indicator tone sounds and the radio’sdisplay shows Alarm Sent. If the Emergency Alertis unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone soundsand the radio displays Alarm Failed.

Exiting Emergency Mode

Note: If the Emergency call ends due to theexpiration of the Emergency Hang Time, but theemergency condition is not over, press theEmergency button again to restart the process.

If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing theprogrammed Emergency button, your radioautomatically exits Emergency mode after receiving aresponse from the Connect Plus system.

If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing theprogrammed Emergency button, your radio will beassigned a channel automatically when one becomesavailable. Once your radio has transmitted amessage indicating the emergency, you cannotcancel your Emergency call. However, if you pressedthe button by accident or the emergency no longerexists, you may wish to say this over the assignedchannel. When you release the PTT button, the

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

221

English

Page 223: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Emergency call is discontinued after the EmergencyCall Hang Time expires.

If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voiceto Follow, use the “hot mic” period to explain yourerror, then press and release the PTT button todiscontinue the transmission. The Emergency call isdiscontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Timeexpires.

Man Down AlarmsNote: Man Down Alarms are not supported whenoperating in Fallback mode. For more information seethe Auto Fallback on page 198.

This section describes the Connect Plus Man DownFeature. This is a purchasable feature that may ormay not apply to your radio.

Your Connect Plus portable radio can be enabled andprogrammed for one or more of the Man DownAlarms. Your dealer or radio system administrator cantell you whether or not this applies to your radio andwhich specific Man Down Alarms have been enabledand programmed.

If your radio has been programmed for one or more ofthe following Man Down Alarms, it is important for you

to understand how the Alarm works, what indication(tones) your radio provides, and the action you shouldtake.

The purpose of the Man Down Alarms is to alertothers when you might be in danger. This isaccomplished by programming your radio to detect acertain angle of tilt, lack of movement, or movement,depending on which Man Down Alarm(s) is/areenabled. If your radio detects a disallowed movementtype, and if the condition is not corrected in a certainperiod of time, the radio starts to play an Alert Tone (ifso programmed). At this point you should immediatelytake one or more of the corrective actions discussedbelow, depending on which Man Down Alarm(s) has/have been enabled for your radio. If you do not takecorrective action within a certain period of time, yourradio automatically starts an Emergency (either anEmergency Call or Emergency Alert).

• Tilt Alarm – When your radio is tilted at or beyonda specified angle for a period of time, it plays anAlert Tone (if so programmed). To prevent theradio from automatically starting an EmergencyCall or Emergency Alert, restore the radio to thevertical position immediately.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

222

English

Page 224: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• Anti-Movement Alarm – When your radio ismotionless for a period of time, it plays an AlertTone (if so programmed). To prevent the radiofrom automatically starting an Emergency Call orEmergency Alert, move the radio immediately.

• Movement Alarm – When your radio is in motionfor a period of time, it plays an Alert Tone (if soprogrammed). To prevent the radio fromautomatically starting an Emergency Call orEmergency Alert, stop the radio’s motionimmediately.

Your dealer or radio system administrator can tell youwhich of the above alarms (if any) has been enabledthrough radio programming. It is possible to enableboth the Tilt and Anti- Movement Alarms. In that case,the Alert Tone plays when the radio detects the firstmovement violation.

Instead of taking the corrective actions discussedabove, you can also prevent the radio from startingthe Emergency call or Emergency Alert by using aprogrammable button, if your radio has beenconfigured in this manner. This is discussed in thenext two sections.

Turning Man Down Alarms On and Off

The procedure for turning the Man Down Alarms Onand Off depends on how your radio is programmed. Ifprogrammed with a Man Down Alarms On/Off button,use the button to toggle the Man Down Alarms Onand Off. This applies to all of the Man Down Alarmsenabled for your radio.

When using the programmable button to toggle theMan Down Alarms On, your radio plays a tone thatrises in pitch and displays a brief confirmationmessage.

When using the programmable button to toggle theMan Down Alarms Off, your radio plays a tone thatfalls in pitch and shows a brief confirmation message.

In order to hear the tones described above whenturning the Man Down Alarms On and Off, theMOTOTRBO radio and Connect Plus Option Boardmust both be enabled for keypad tones.

If your radio has been programmed so that ManDown Alarms can be turned On and Off via the menu,follow the procedure below.

1 to access the menu.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

223

English

Page 225: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Connect Plus and press to

select.

4 or to Man Down Alarm and press to

select.

If Man Down Alarm is currently disabled, theEnable option is shown.

If Man Down Alarm is currently enabled, theDisable option is shown.

5 or to Enable or Disable and press

to select.

Resetting the Man Down Alarms

If your radio has been programmed with either a ManDown Alarms Reset button, or the Man Down Alarmsmenu option, it is possible to reset the Man DownAlarms without turning them On or Off. This stops anyMan Down Alert Tone that is currently playing, and it

also resets the Alarm timers. However, it is stillnecessary to correct the movement violation by takingthe appropriate corrective action described in the ManDown Alarms section. If the movement violation is notcorrected within a period of time, the Alert Tone startsplaying again.

The procedure for resetting the Man Down Alarmsdepends on how your radio is programmed. Ifprogrammed with a Man Down Alarms Reset button,use the button to Reset the Man Down Alarms. Thisapplies to all of the Man Down Alarms enabled foryour radio.

When using the programmable button to reset theMan Down Alarms, the radio shows a briefconfirmation message.

If your radio has been programmed so that ManDown Alarms can be Reset via the menu, follow theprocedure below.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

224

English

Page 226: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

3 or to Connect Plus and press to

select.

4 or to Man Down Alarm and press to

select.

5 or to Reset and press to select.

The radio displays a brief confirmation message.

Beacon FeatureThis section describes the Beacon feature. TheBeacon feature is part of Connect Plus Man Down, apurchasable feature. Your dealer or Radio SystemAdministrator can tell you if the Beacon featureapplies to your radio.

If your radio has been enabled and programmed forone or more of the Man Down Alarms, it can also beenabled for the Beacon feature.

If your radio automatically starts an Emergency Callor Emergency Alert due to one of the Man DownAlarms, and if your radio is also enabled for theBeacon feature, the radio starts to periodically emit a

high pitched tone approximately once every tenseconds. The interval can vary depending on whetheryou are talking on your radio. The purpose of theBeacon tone is to help searchers locate you. If yourradio has also been enabled for the “Visual Beacon”,the radio’s backlight comes on for a few secondsevery time the Beacon tone plays.

You can stop your radio from playing the Beacon toneby using a programmable button, if your radio hasbeen configured in this manner. This is discussed inthe next two sections. If your radio does not have theprogrammable button or menu option, you can stopthe Beacon tone by turning the radio off and then onagain, or by changing to a different zone (if your radiohas been programmed for more than one zone).

Turning Beacon On and Off

The procedure for turning the Beacon On and Offdepends on how your radio is programmed. Ifprogrammed with a Beacon On/Off button, use thebutton to toggle the Beacon On and Off.

• When using the programmable button to togglethe Beacon On, your radio plays a tone that risesin pitch and shows a brief confirmation message.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

225

English

Page 227: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• When using the programmable button to togglethe Beacon Off, your radio plays a tone that falls inpitch and shows a brief confirmation message.

In order to hear the tones described above whenturning the Beacon On and Off, the MOTOTRBOradio and Connect Plus Option Board must both beenabled for keypad tones. If your radio has beenprogrammed so that the Beacon can be turned Onand Off via the menu, follow the procedure below.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Connect Plus and press to

select.

4 or to Beacon and press to select.

If Beacon is currently disabled, the Enable optionis shown.

If Beacon is currently enabled, the Disable optionis shown.

5 or to Enable or Disable and press

to select.The radio shows a brief message to confirm thatMan Down Beacon was enabled (or disabled).

Resetting the Beacon

If your radio has been programmed with either theBeacon Reset button, or the Beacon menu option, itis possible to reset the Beacon. This stops theBeacon Tone (and also the Visual Beacon) withoutturning the Beacon feature Off. The procedure forresetting the Beacon depends on how your radio isprogrammed. If programmed with a Beacon Resetbutton, use the button to Reset the Beacon. Whenusing the programmable button to reset the ManDown Alarms, your radio shows a brief confirmationmessage. If your radio has been programmed so thatthe Beacon can be Reset via the menu, follow theprocedure below.

1 to access the menu.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

226

English

Page 228: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Connect Plus and press to

select.

4 or to Beacon and press to select.

5 or to Reset and press to select.

The radio displays a brief confirmation message.

Text Message FeaturesYour radio is able to receive data, for example a textmessage, from another radio or a text messageapplication.

The maximum length of characters for a textmessage is 140.

The radio exits the current screen once the inactivitytimer expires.

Note: For the Arabic language, the text entryorientation is from right to left.

Note: Long press at any time to return to theHome screen.

Writing and Sending a Text Message

1 Access the Text Message feature.RadioControls

Steps

Programmed TextMessagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

2 or to Compose and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

3 Use the keypad to type your message.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

227

English

Page 229: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entrymethod.

4Press once message is composed.

5 If you are sending the message, select therecipient by

• or to the required alias and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.

If the text message fails to send, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 231).

Sending a Quick Text Message

Your radio supports a maximum of 10 Quick Textmessages as programmed by your dealer.

While Quick Text messages are predefined, you canedit each message before sending it.

If you are sending the message, select therecipient by

• or to the required alias and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display shows

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

228

English

Page 230: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.

If the text message fails to send, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 231).

Sending a Quick Text Message with the One TouchAccess Button

Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to send a predefined Quick Text messageto a predefined alias.The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.

If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the displayshows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.

If the text message fails to send, the radio returns youto the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 231).

Accessing the Drafts Folder

You can save a text message to send it at a latertime.

If a PTT button press or a mode change causes theradio to exit the text message writing/editing screenwhile you are in the process of writing or editing a textmessage, your current text message is automaticallysaved to the Drafts folder.

The most recent saved text message is always addedto the top of the Drafts list.

The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) lastsaved messages. When the folder is full, the nextsaved text message automatically replaces the oldesttext message in the folder.

Note: Long press at any time to return to theHome screen.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

229

English

Page 231: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Viewing a Saved Text Message

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Drafts and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message

1Press again while viewing the message.

2 or to Edit and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

3 Use the keypad to type your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entrymethod.

4Press once message is composed.

5 Select the message recipient by

• or to the required alias and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display shows

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

230

English

Page 232: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.

If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved tothe Sent Items folder and marked with a SendFailed icon.

Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts

1 Access the Text Message feature.Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

Radio Controls Steps

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Drafts and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

4 or to Delete and press to delete the

text message.

Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages

You can select one of the following options while atthe Resend option screen:

• Resend.• Forward.• Edit.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

231

English

Page 233: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Resending a Text Message

Press to resend the same message to thesame subscriber/group alias or ID.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows the positive mini notice.

If the message cannot be sent, the display showsthe negative mini notice.

Forwarding a Text Message

Select Forward to send the message to anothersubscriber/group alias or ID.

1 or to Forward and press to select.

2 Select the message recipient by

• or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display shows

a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.

Editing a Text Message

Select Edit to edit the message before sending it.

1 or to Edit and press to select.

A blinking cursor appears.

2 Use the keypad to edit your message.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwantedAdv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

232

English

Page 234: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

characters. Long press to change text entrymethod.

3Press once message is composed.

4 Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-edit, or delete the newly composed message, doone of the following.

• or to Send, and press to send the

message.•

or to Save, and press to save themessage to the Drafts folder.

• to edit the message.

• again to choose between deleting the

message or saving it to the Drafts folder.

5 If you are sending the message, select therecipient by

• or to the required alias or ID and press

to select.•

or to Manual Dial, and press toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or

ID and press .

The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.

Managing Sent Text Messages

Once a message is sent to another radio, it is savedin Sent Items. The most recent sent text message isalways added to the top of the Sent Items list.

The Sent Items folder is capable of storing amaximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When the

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

233

English

Page 235: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

folder is full, the next sent text message automaticallyreplaces the oldest text message in the folder.

Note: Long press at any time to return to theHome screen.

Viewing a Sent Text Message

1 Access the Text Message feature.RadioControls

Steps

Programmed TextMessagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

2 or to Sent Items and press to

select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

The icon at the top right corner of the screenindicates the status of the message (see Sent ItemIcons on page 179).

Sending a Sent Text Message

You can select one of the following options whileviewing a sent text message:

• Resend• Forward• Edit• Delete

1Press again while viewing the message.

2 or to one of the following options and

press to select.Option Steps

Forward Select Forward to send the selectedtext message to another subscriber/

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

234

English

Page 236: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Option Steps

group alias or ID (see Forwarding aText Message on page 232).

Edit Select Edit to edit the selected textmessage before sending it (see Editing a Text Message on page232).

Delete Select Delete to delete the textmessage.

Resend Select Resend to resend theselected text message to the samesubscriber/group alias or ID.

The display shows SendingMessage, confirming that the samemessage is being sent to the sametarget radio.

If the message is sent successfully,a tone sounds and the displayshows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, alow tone sounds and the displayshows Message Send Failed.

Option Steps

If the message fails to send, theradio returns you to the Resend

option screen. Press to resendthe message to the samesubscriber/group alias or ID.

Note: If you exit the messagesending screen while the messageis being sent, the radio updates thestatus of the message in the SentItems folder without providing anyindication in the display or viasound.

Note: If the radio changes mode orpowers down before the status ofthe message in Sent Items isupdated, the radio cannot completeany In- Progress messages andautomatically marks it with a SendFailed icon.

Note: The radio supports amaximum of five (5) In-Progress

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

235

English

Page 237: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Option Steps

messages at one time. During thisperiod, the radio cannot send anynew message and automaticallymarks it with a Send Failed icon.

If you exit the message sending screen while themessage is being sent, the radio updates thestatus of the message in the Sent Items folderwithout providing any indication in the display orvia sound.

If the radio changes mode or powers down beforethe status of the message in Sent Items isupdated, the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and automatically marks itwith a Send Failed icon.

The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-Progress messages at one time. During thisperiod, the radio cannot send any new messageand automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.

Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items

1 Access the Text Message feature by performingone of the following actions:

Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Sent Items and press to

select.

When you select Sent Items and it contains notext messages, the display shows List Empty,and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turnedon (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page139).

3 or to Delete All and press to

select.

4 Choose one of the following.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

236

English

Page 238: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• or to Yes and press to select. The

display shows positive mini notice.•

or to No and press to return to theprevious screen.

Receiving a Text Message

When your radio receives a message, the displayshows the Notification List with the alias or ID of thesender and the Message icon.

You can select one of the following options whenreceiving a text message:

• Read.• Read Later.• Delete.

Reading a Text Message

1 or to Read? and press to select.

Selected message in the Inbox opens.

2 Do one of the following:

•Press to return to the Inbox.

•Press a second time to reply, forward, ordelete the text message.

Managing Received Text Messages

Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. TheInbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30messages.

Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according tothe most recently received.

Your radio supports the following options for textmessages:

• Reply• Forward• Delete• Delete All

Note: If the channel type is not a match, you can onlyforward, delete, or delete all Received messages.

Long press at any time to return to the Homescreen.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

237

English

Page 239: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and press to select.

3 or to Inbox and press to select.

4 or toview the messages.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to select the current message, and

press again to reply, forward, or deletethat message.

•Long press to return to the Home screen.

Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox

1 Access the Text Message feature.

RadioControls

Steps

Programmed TextMessagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages and

press to select.

2 or to Inbox and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

4Press once more to access the sub-menu.

5 Do one of the following:Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

238

English

Page 240: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• or to Reply and press to select.

• or to Quick Reply and press to

select.

A blinking cursor appears.

6 Use your keypad to write/edit your message.

7Press once message is composed.

The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.

If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.

If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.

If the message cannot be sent, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 231).

Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox

1 Access the Text Message feature by performingone of the following actions:

Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Inbox and press to select.

3 or to the required message and press

to select.

4Press once more to access the sub-menu.

5 or to Delete and press to select.

6 or to Yes and press to select.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

239

English

Page 241: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

The display shows Message Deleted, and thescreen returns to the Inbox.

Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox

1 Access the Text Message feature by performingone of the following actions:Radio Controls Steps

ProgrammedText Messagebutton

Press the programmed TextMessage button.

Menu 1 to access the menu.

2 or to Messages

and press to select.

2 or to Inbox and press to select.

When you select Inbox and it contains no textmessages, the display shows List Empty, andsounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page139).

3 or to Delete All and press to

select.

4 or to Yes and press to select.

The display shows Inbox Cleared.

PrivacyIf enabled, this feature helps to preventeavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channelby the use of a software-based scrambling solution.The signaling and user identification portions of atransmission are not scrambled.

Your radio must have privacy enabled on the currentchannel selector position to send a privacy-enabledtransmission, although this is not a necessaryrequirement for receiving a transmission. While on aprivacy-enabled channel selector position, the radio isstill able to receive clear (unscrambled)transmissions.

Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy.

To unscramble a privacy-enabled call transmission,your radio must be programmed to have the same

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

240

English

Page 242: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as thetransmitting radio.

If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of adifferent Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing atall (Enhanced Privacy).

If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the Homescreen shows the Secure or Unsecure icon, exceptwhen the radio is sending or receiving an Emergencycall or alarm.

The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio isreceiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission.

You can access this feature by performing one of thefollowing actions:

• Pressing the programmed Privacy button totoggle privacy on or off.

• Using the Radio Menu as described by the stepsdescribed next.

Note: Some radio models may not offer this Privacyfeature. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings or or to

Connect Plus and press to select.

4 or to Enhanced Privacy.

If the display shows Turn On, press toenable Privacy. The radio displays a messageconfirming your selection.

If the display shows Turn Off, press todisable Privacy. The radio displays a messageconfirming your selection.

If the radio has a privacy type assigned, thesecure or unsecure icon appears on the statusbar, except when the radio is sending or receivingan Emergency Alert.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

241

English

Page 243: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Making a Privacy-Enabled (Scrambled) Call

Toggle privacy on using the programmed privacybutton or by using the menu. Your radio must havethe Privacy feature enabled for the currently selectedchannel position to send a privacy-enabledtransmission. When privacy is enabled for thecurrently selected channel position, all voicetransmissions made by your radio will be scrambled.This includes Group Call, Multigroup Call, talk-backduring scanned calls, Site All Call, Emergency Call,and Private Call. Only receiving radios with the sameKey Value and Key ID as your radio will be able tounscramble the transmission.

SecurityYou can enable or disable any radio in the system.For example, you might want to disable a stolenradio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enablethat radio, when it is recovered.

Note: Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limitedto radios with these functions enabled. Check withyour dealer or system administrator for moreinformation.

Radio Disable

1 Access this feature byRadioControls

Steps

RadioDisablebutton

1 Press the programmed RadioDisable button.

2 or to the required alias or

ID and press to select.

Radiomenu

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and

press to select. The entriesare alphabetically sorted.

3 Use one of the steps describednext to select the requiredsubscriber alias or ID:

• Select the required alias or IDdirectly.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

242

English

Page 244: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControls

Steps

• or to the required

alias or ID and press to select.

• Use the Manual Dial menu

• or to Manual

Dial and press toselect.

• or to Radio

Number and press toselect.

• The first line of the displayshows Radio Number:.the second line of thedisplay shows a blinkingcursor. Use the keypad toenter the subscriber alias

or ID and press .

RadioControls

Steps

4 or to Radio Disable

and press to select.

The display shows Radio Disable: <TargetAlias or ID> and the LED blinks green.

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds andthe display shows Radio Disable Successful.

If not successful, a negative indicator tone soundsand the display shows Radio Disable Failed.

Radio Enable

1 Access this feature byRadioControls

Steps

RadioEnablebutton

1 Press the programmed RadioEnable button.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

243

English

Page 245: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControls

Steps

2 or to the required alias or

ID and press to select.

Radiomenu

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Contacts and press

to select. The entries arealphabetically sorted.

3 Use one of the steps describednext to select the requiredsubscriber alias or ID

• select the required alias or IDdirectly

• or to the required

alias or ID and press to select.

• use the Manual Dial menu

RadioControls

Steps

• or to Manual Dial

and press to select.• or to Radio

Number and press toselect.

• The first line of the displayshows Radio Number: .the second line of thedisplay shows a blinkingcursor. Use the keypad toenter the subscriber alias

or ID and press .4 or to Radio Enable and

press to select.

The display shows Radio Enable: <SubscriberAlias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

244

English

Page 246: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2 Wait for acknowledgement.

If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds andthe display shows Radio Enable Successful.

If not successful, a negative indicator tone soundsand the display shows Radio Enable Failed.

Password Lock FeaturesIf enabled, this feature only allows you access yourradio if the correct password is entered uponpowering up.

Accessing the Radio from Password

1 Power up the radio.The radio sounds a continuous tone.

2 Do one of the following:

• Enter your current four-digit password with theradio’s keypad. The display shows . Press

to proceed.• Enter your current four-digit password. Press

or to edit each digit’s numeric value.

Each digit changes to . Press to move to

next digit. Press to confirm your selection.

You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit

entered. Press to remove each on thedisplay. The radio sounds a negative indicator

tone, if you press when the line is empty, or ifyou press more than four digits.

If the password is correct, the radio proceeds topower up. See Powering Up the Radio on page22.

If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password. Repeat Step 2.

After the third incorrect password, the displayshows Wrong Password and then, shows RadioLocked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinksyellow.

Note: The radio is unable to receive any call,including emergency calls, in locked state.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

245

English

Page 247: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Turning the Password Lock On or Off

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Passwd Lock and press to

select.

5 Enter the four-digit password.See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Passwordon page 245.

6Press to proceed.

If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password, and automatically returns to theprevious menu.

7 If the password entered in the previous step is

correct, press to enable/disable passwordlock.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Unlocking the Radio from Locked State

1 If your radio was powered down after being in thelocked state, power up the radio.A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow.The display shows Radio Locked.

2 Wait for 15 minutes.Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for lockedstate when you power up.

3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 in Accessing the Radio fromPassword on page 245.

Changing the Password

1 to access the menu.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

246

English

Page 248: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Passwd Lock and press to

select.

5 Enter the four-digit password.See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Passwordon page 245.

6Press to proceed.If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password, and automatically returns to theprevious menu.

7 If the password entered in the previous step is

correct, or to Change Pwd and press to select.

8 Enter a new four-digit password.

See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Passwordon page 245.

9 Reenter the previously entered four-digitpassword. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radiofrom Password on page 245.

10Press to proceed.

If the reentered password matches the newpassword entered earlier, the display showsPassword Changed.

If the reentered password does NOT match thenew password entered earlier, the display showsPasswords Do Not Match.

The screen automatically returns to the previousmenu.

Bluetooth OperationNote: If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-relatedfeatures are disabled and the Bluetooth devicedatabase is erased.

This feature allows you to use your radio with aBluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wireless

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

247

English

Page 249: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports bothMotorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices.

Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed pathbetween your radio and your Bluetooth-enableddevice.

It is not recommended that you leave your radiobehind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device towork with a high degree of reliability when they areseparated.

At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tonequality will start to sound “garbled” or “broken”. Tocorrect this problem, simply position your radio andBluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (withinthe 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establishclear audio reception. Your radio’s Bluetooth functionhas a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-meter/32 feet range.

Your radio can support up to 4 simultaneousBluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enableddevices of unique types. For example, a headset, anda PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections withBluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are notsupported.

Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device’suser manual for more details on your Bluetooth-enabled device’s full capabilities.

Turning Bluetooth On and Off

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to My Status and press to select.

The display shows On and Off. The current statusis indicated by a .

4 Do one of the following:

• or to On and press to select. The

display shows On and a appears left of theselected status.

• or to Off and press to select. The

display shows Off and a appears left of theselected status.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

248

English

Page 250: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device

Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or

press during the finding and connectingoperation as this cancels the operation.

1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and placeit in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

2On your radio, press to access the menu.

3 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

4 or to Devices and press to select.

5 Do one of the following:

• or to the required device and press

to select.

• or to Find Devices to locate availabledevices. or to the required device and

press to select.

6 or to Connect and press to select.

Display shows Connecting to <Device>. YourBluetooth-enabled device may require additionalsteps to complete the pairing. Refer to respectiveBluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

If successful, the radio display shows<Device>Connected. A tone sounds and appearsbesides the connected device. The BluetoothConnected icon appears on the status bar.

If unsuccessful, the radio display shows ConnectingFailed.

Note: If pin code is required, use the same entrymethod as Step 2 in Accessing the Radio fromPassword on page 245.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

249

English

Page 251: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device(Discoverable Mode)

Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during thefinding and connecting operation as this may cancelthe operation.

1 Turn Bluetooth On.See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 132.

2 to access the menu.

3 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

4 or to Find Me and press to select.

Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-enabled devices for a programmed duration. Thisis called Discoverable Mode.

5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair itwith your radio.Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’suser manual.

Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device

1On your radio, press to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to Disconnect and press to

select.Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>.Your Bluetooth-enabled device may requireadditional steps to disconnect. Refer to respectiveBluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.

The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. Apositive indicator tone sounds and disappearsbeside the connected device. The BluetoothConnected icon disappears on the status bar.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

250

English

Page 252: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speakerand Bluetooth Device

You can toggle audio routing between internal radiospeaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.

Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switchbutton.

• A tone sounds and display shows Route Audioto Radio.

• A tone sounds and display shows Route Audioto Bluetooth.

Viewing Device Details

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to View Details and press to

select.

Editing Device Name

You can edit the name of available Bluetooth-enableddevices.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to Edit Name and press to select.

6Press to move one space to the left. Press to

move one space to the right. Press to delete

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

251

English

Page 253: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

any unwanted characters. Long press tochange text entry method.A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to typethe required zone.

7 The display shows Device Name Saved.

Deleting Device Name

You can remove a disconnected device from the listof Bluetooth-enabled devices.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to Devices and press to select.

4 or to the required device and press

to select.

5 or to Delete and press to select.

The display shows Device Deleted.

Bluetooth Mic Gain

Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enableddevice’s microphone gain value.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Bluetooth and press to select.

3 or to BT Mic Gain and press to

select.

4 or to the BT Mic Gain type and the currentvalues.

To edit values, press to select.

5 or to increase or to decrease values and

press to select.Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

252

English

Page 254: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode

Note: The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Modecan only be enabled in MOTOTRBO CPS. If enabled,the Bluetooth item will not be displayed in the Menuand you will not be able to use any Bluetoothprogrammable button features.

Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate yourradio, but the devices cannot connect to the radio. Itenables dedicated devices to use your radio positionin the process of Bluetooth-based location.

Notification ListYour radio has a Notification List that collects all your“unread” events on the channel, such as unread textmessages, missed calls, and call alerts.

The Notification icon appears on the status bar whenthe Notification List has one or more events.

The list supports a maximum of forty (40) unreadevents. When it is full, the next event automaticallyreplaces the oldest event.

Note: After the events are read, they are removedfrom the Notification List.

Accessing the Notification List

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Notification and press to

select.

3 or to the required event and press to

select.

Long press to return to the Home Screen.

Utilities

Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off

You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) ifneeded.

Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button totoggle all tones on or off, or follow the proceduredescribed next to access this feature via the radiomenu.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

253

English

Page 255: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to All Tones and press to select.

6Press to enable/disable all tones and alerts.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning Keypad Tones On or Off

You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Keypad Tones and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable keypad tones.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

254

English

Page 256: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level

You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level ifneeded. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voicevolume.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Vol. Offset and press to

select.

6 or to the required volume value.The radio sounds a feedback tone with eachcorresponding volume value.

7 Do one of the following:

•Press to keep the required displayedvolume value.

•Press to exit without changing the currentvolume offset settings.

Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off

You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone ifneeded.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

255

English

Page 257: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

5 or to Talk Permit and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable the Talk PermitTone.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off

You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Toneif needed.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Tones/Alerts and press to

select.

5 or to Power Up and press to select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable the Power Up AlertTone.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Setting the Power Level

You can customize your radio’s power setting to highor low for each Connect Plus zone.

High enables communication with tower sites inConnect Plus mode located at a considerable

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

256

English

Page 258: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

distance from you. Low enables communication withtower sites in Connect Plus mode in closer proximity.

Press the programmed Power Level button to toggletransmit power level between high and low. Followthe procedure described next to access this featurevia the radio’s menus.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Power and press to select.

5 or to the required setting and press

to select. appears beside selected setting. At any time,

long press to return to the Home screen.

Screen returns to the previous menu.

Changing the Display Mode

You can change radio’s display mode between Dayor Night, as needed. This affects the color palette ofthe display.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Display and press to select.

The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode.

Note: or to change the selected option.

5 or to the required setting and press

to enable. appears besides selected setting.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

257

English

Page 259: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Adjusting the Display Brightness

You can adjust radio’s display brightness as needed.

Note: Display brightness cannot be adjusted when“Auto Brightness” is enabled.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Display and press to select.

5 or to Brightness and press to

select.The display shows a progress bar.

6Decrease display brightness by pressing or

increase the display brightness by pressing .

Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirmyour entry.

Setting the Display Backlight Timer

You can set the the radio’s display backlight timer asneeded. The setting also affects the Menu NavigationButtons and keypad backlighting accordingly.

Press the programmed Backlight button to toggle thebacklight settings, or follow the procedure describednext to access this feature via the radio menu.

The display backlight and keypad backlighting areautomatically turned off if the LED indicator isdisabled (see Turning the LED Indicator On or Off onpage 149).

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

258

English

Page 260: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

4 or to Display and press to select.

5 or to Backlight Timer and press to

select.

You can use or to change the selectedoption.

Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off

You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen ifneeded.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Display and press to select.

5 or to Intro Screen and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6Press to enable/disable the IntroductionScreen.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Locking and Unlocking the Keypad

You can lock your radio’s keypad to avoid inadvertentkey entry.

To lock/unlock your radio’s keypad.Option Steps

Locking theKeypad

1 to access the menu.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

259

English

Page 261: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Option Steps

2 or to Utilities and

press to select.3 or to Radio Settings

and press to select.4 or to Keypad Lock and

press to select.

You can also use or to changethe selected option.

Unlockingthe Keypad Press followed by .

After the keypad is locked, the display showsKeypad Locked and returns to the Home screen.

After the keypad is unlocked, the display showsKeypad Unlocked and returns to the Homescreen.

Language

You can set your radio display to be in your requiredlanguage.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Languages and press to select.

You can also use or to change selectedoption.

5 or to the required language and press

to enable. appears beside selectedlanguage.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

260

English

Page 262: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Turning the LED Indicator On or Off

You can enable and disable the LED Indicator ifneeded.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to LED Indicator and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5Press to enable/disable the LED Indicator.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

Identifying Cable Type

You can select the type of cable your radio uses.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Cable Type and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5 The current cable type is indicated by a .

Voice Announcement

This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate thecurrent Zone or Channel the user has just assigned,or programmable button press. This audio indicatorcan be customized per customer requirements. This

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

261

English

Page 263: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

is typically useful when the user is in a difficultcondition to read the content shown on the display.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Voice Announcement and press

to select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Voice Announcement.The display shows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Voice Announcement.The disappears from beside Enabled.

Menu Timer

Set the period of time your radio stays in the menubefore it automatically switches to the Home screen.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Display and press to select.

5 or to Menu Timer and press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

262

English

Page 264: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

6 or to the required setting and press

to select.

Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)

This feature controls the your radio's microphone gainautomatically while transmitting on a digital system. Itsuppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to apreset value in order to provide a consistent level ofaudio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

4 or to Mic AGC-D and press to select.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Mic AGC-D. The displayshows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Mic AGC-D. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Intelligent Audio

Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volumeto overcome background noise in the environment,inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noisesources. This feature is a Receive-only feature anddoes not affect Transmit audio.

Note: This feature is not applicable during aBluetooth session.

1 to access the menu.

RadioControl

Steps

Menu 1 to access the menu.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

263

English

Page 265: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

RadioControl

Steps

2 or to Radio Settings and

press to select.3 or to Radio Settings and

press to select.4 or to Intelligent Audio

and press to select.

Note: You can also use or tochange the selected option.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable IntelligentAudio. The display shows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable IntelligentAudio. The disappears frombeside Enabled.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Intelligent Audio and press

to select.

5 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Intelligent Audio. Thedisplay shows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Intelligent Audio. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature Onor Off

This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedbackin received calls.

1 to access the menu.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

264

English

Page 266: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to AF Suppressor and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

5 Do one of the following.

•Press to enable Acoustic FeedbackSuppressor. The display shows besideEnabled.

•Press to disable Acoustic FeedbackSuppressor. The disappears from besideEnabled.

Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion ControlFeature On or Off

This feature allows you to enable the radio toautomatically monitor the microphone input andadjust the microphone gain value to avoid audioclipping.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

4 or to Mic Distortion and press to

select.

5 Do one of the following:

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

265

English

Page 267: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

•Press to enable Microphone DynamicDistortion Control. The display shows besideEnabled.

•Press to disable Microphone DynamicDistortion Control. The disappears frombeside Enabled.

Turning the Global Positioning System (GPS) On or Off

GPS is a satellite navigation system that determinesthe radio’s precise location. Press the programmedGPS button to toggle the feature on or off.

Note: Selected radio models may offer GPS andGlobal Navigation Satellite System (GNSS).

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to GPS and press to select.

5Press to enable/disable GPS.

The display shows beside Enabled.

The disappears from beside Enabled.

See Checking the GPS Information on page 170 fordetails on retrieving GPS information.

Text Entry Configuration

You can configure the following settings for enteringtext on your radio:

• Word Predict• Word Correct• Sentence Cap• My Words

Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

• Numbers• Symbols• Predictive or Multi-Tap• Language (If programmed)

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

266

English

Page 268: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Note: Press at any time to return to the previous

screen or long press to return to the HomeScreen. The radio exits the current screen once theinactivity timer expires.

Word Predict

Your radio can learn common word sequences thatyou often enter. It then predicts the next word youmay want to use after you enter the first word of acommon word sequence into the text editor.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to Word Predict and press to

select.

You can also use or to change the selectedoption.

6 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Word Predict. The displayshows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Word Predict. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Sentence Cap

Automatically enables capitalization for the first letterin the first word for every new sentence.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

267

English

Page 269: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to Sentence Cap and press to

select.

6 Do one of the following:

•Press to enable Sentence Cap. Thedisplay shows beside Enabled.

•Press to disable Sentence Cap. The disappears from beside Enabled.

Viewing Custom Words

You can add your own custom words into your radio’sin-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list tocontain these words.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to List of Words and press to

select.Display shows the list of custom words.

Editing Custom Word

You can edit the custom words saved in your radio.

1 to access the menu.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

268

English

Page 270: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to List of Words and press to

select.Display shows the list of custom words.

7 or to the required word and press to

select.

8 or to Edit and press to select.

9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method. Press once your custom word iscompleted.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour custom word is being saved.

If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the custom word is not saved, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

Adding Custom Word

You can add your own custom words into your radio’sin-built dictionary.

1 to access the menu.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

269

English

Page 271: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to Add New Word and press to

select.Display shows the list of custom words.

7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word.

Press to move one space to the left. Press or

the key to move one space to the right.

Press the key to delete any unwanted

characters. Long press to change text entry

method. Press once your custom word iscompleted.

The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour custom word is being saved.

If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.

If the custom word is not saved, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.

Deleting a Custom Word

You can delete the custom words saved in your radio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

270

English

Page 272: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to the required word and press to

select.

7 or to Delete and press to select.

8 Choose one of the following.

•At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes.The display shows Entry Deleted.

• or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Deleting All Custom Words

You can delete all custom words from your radio’s in-built.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Settings and press to

select.

4 or to Text Entry and press to

select.

5 or to My Words and press to select.

6 or to Delete All and press to

select.

7 Choose one of the following.

•At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes.The display shows Entry Deleted.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

271

English

Page 273: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• or to No and press to return to the

previous screen.

Accessing General Radio Information

Your radio contains information on the following:

• Battery• Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer)• Radio Model Number Index• Option Board Over-the-Air (OTA) Codeplug CRC• Site Number• Site Info• Radio Alias and ID• Firmware and Codeplug Versions• GPS Information

Press at any time to return to the previous

screen or long press to return to the Homescreen. The radio exits the current screen once theinactivity timer expires.

Accessing the Battery Information

Displays information on your radio battery.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Battery Info and press to

select.

The display shows the battery information.

For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display readsRecondition Battery if the battery requiresreconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After thereconditioning process, the display then shows thebattery information.

Checking the Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer)

Note: The measurement on the display shows the

degree of tilt at the moment you press to acceptthe Accelerometer option. If you change the angle

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

272

English

Page 274: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

of the radio after pressing , the radio does notchange the measurement shown on its display. Itcontinues to display the measurement taken when

was pressed.

If the portable radio has been enabled for the ManDown Alarms, there is a menu option to check howthe radio measures the degree of tilt. This is a helpfulfeature when the dealer or Radio SystemAdministrator uses the MOTOTRBO Connect PlusOption Board CPS programming software toconfigure the activation angle that will trigger the tiltalarm.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 Tilt the radio at the angle that triggers the TiltAlarm.

5 or to Accelerometer and press to

select.The display shows the radio’s angle of tilt(deviation from perpendicular vertical position) indegrees (example: 62 Deg.) Based on this, useMOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS toconfigure the Activation Angle for 60 degrees(which is the closest programmable value). TheTilt Alarm timers are triggered when the ActivationAngle is 60 degrees, or greater.

Checking the Radio Model Number Index

This index number identifies your radio’s model-specific hardware. Your radio system administratormay ask for this number when preparing a newOption Board codeplug for your radio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

273

English

Page 275: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Model Index and press to

select.The display shows the Model Number Index.

Checking the CRC of the Option Board OTACodeplug File

Follow the instructions below if your radio systemadministrator asks you to view the Option Board OTACodeplug File CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). Thismenu option only appears if the Option Boardreceived its last codeplug update OTA.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to OB OTA CPcrc and press to

select.The display shows some letters and numbers.Communicate this information to your radiosystem administrator exactly as shown.

Displaying the Site ID (Site Number)

Note: If you are not currently registered at a site, thedisplay shows Not Registered.

The radio briefly shows the Site ID as it registers witha Connect Plus site. Following registration, the radiodoes not generally indicate the Site number. Todisplay the registered Site number, do the following:

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

274

English

Page 276: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

4 or to Site Number and press to

select.The display shows the Network ID and the SiteNumber.

Checking the Site Info

Note: If you are not currently registered at a site, thedisplay shows Not Registered.

The Site Info feature provides information that can beuseful to a service technician. It consists of thefollowing information:

• Repeater number of current Control Channelrepeater.

• RSSI: Last signal strength value measured fromControl Channel repeater.

• Neighbor List sent by Control Channel repeater(five numbers separated by commas).

If you are requested to use this feature, please reportthe displayed information exactly as it appears on thescreen.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Site Info and press to select.

The display shows the Site Info.

Checking the Radio ID

This feature displays the ID of your radio.

Follow the procedure described next to access thisfeature via the radio screen.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

275

English

Page 277: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

4 or to My ID and press to select.

The display shows the radio ID.

Checking the Firmware Version and CodeplugVersion

Displays the firmware version on your radio.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Versions and press to select.

The display a list with the following information:

• (Radio) Firmware Version• (Radio) Codeplug Version• Option Board Firmware Version• Option Board Frequency Version• Option Board Hardware Version

• Option Board Codeplug Version

Checking for Updates

Connect Plus provides the ability to update certainfiles (Option Board Codeplug, Network FrequencyFile and Option Board Firmware File) over-the-air.

Note: Check with the dealer or network administratorto determine whether this feature has been enabledfor your radio.

Any display Connect Plus radio has the ability toshow its current Option Board OTA Codeplug CRC,Frequency File version or Option Board firmware fileversion via a menu option. In addition, display radiosthat have been enabled for over-the-air file transfercan display the version of a "pending file". A "pendingfile" is a Frequency File or Option Board firmware filethat the Connect Plus radio knows about via systemmessaging, but the radio has not yet collected all ofthe file’s packets. If a display Connect Plus radio hasa pending file, the menu provides options to:

• See the version number of the pending file.• See what percentage of packets has been

collected so far.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

276

English

Page 278: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

• Request the Connect Plus radio to resumecollecting file packets.

If the radio is enabled for Connect Plus over-the-airfile transfer, there may be times when the radioautomatically joins a file transfer without first notifyingthe radio user. While the radio is collecting filepackets, the LED rapidly blinks red and the radiodisplays the High Volume Data icon on the HomeScreen status bar.

Note: The Connect Plus radio cannot collect filepackets and receive calls at the same time. If youwish to cancel the file transfer, press and release thePTT button. This causes the radio to request a call onthe selected Contact Name, and it will also cancel thefile transfer for that radio until the process resumes ata later time.

There are several things that can make the filetransfer process start again. The first example appliesto all over-the-air file types. The other examples applyonly to the Network Frequency File and Option BoardFirmware File:

• The radio system administrator re-initiates theover-the-air file transfer.

• The Option Board's pre-defined timer expires,which causes the Option Board to automaticallyresume the process of collecting packets.

• The timer has not yet expired, but the radio userrequests the file transfer to resume via the menuoption.

After the Connect Plus radio finishes downloading allfile packets, it must upgrade to the newly acquiredfile. For the Network Frequency File, this is anautomatic process and does not require a radio reset.For the Option Board Codeplug File, this is anautomatic process that will cause a brief interruptionto service as the Option Board loads the newcodeplug information and re-acquires a network site.How quickly the radio upgrades to a new OptionBoard firmware file depends on how the radio hasbeen configured by the dealer or systemadministrator. The radio will either upgradeimmediately after collecting all file packets, or it willwait until the next time that the user turns the radioon.

Note: Check with your dealer or system administratorto determine how your radio has been programmed.

The process of upgrading to a new Option Boardfirmware file takes several seconds, and it requires

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

277

English

Page 279: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

the Connect Plus Option Board to reset the radio.Once the upgrade starts, the radio use will not beable to make or receive calls until the process iscompleted.

Firmware FileFirmware Up to Date

Note: If the Option Board firmware file is not Up toDate (and if the radio has partially collected a morerecent Option Board firmware file version) the radiodisplays a list with additional options; Version,%Received, and Download.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Updates and press to select.

5 or to Firmware and press to select.

The display shows Firmware is Up to Date.

Pending Firmware – Version

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Updates and press to select.

5 or to Firmware and press to select.

6 or to Version and press to select.

If there is a pending Option Board firmware file,the display shows the pending firmware versionnumber.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

278

English

Page 280: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

If there is a pending Option Board firmware file,the display shows Firmware is Up to Date.

Pending Firmware – % Received

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Updates and press to select.

5 or to Firmware and press to select.

6 or to %Received and press to select.

The screen displays the percentage of firmwarefile packets collected so far.

Note: When at 100%, the radio needs to be powercycled Off and then On to initiate the firmwareupgrade.

Pending Firmware – Download

If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTAOption Board Firmware File Transfer with a partialfile, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (ifstill ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If youwant the unit to rejoin an ongoing Option BoardFirmware File transfer prior to expiration of thisinternal timer, use the Download option as describedbelow.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Updates and press to select.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

279

English

Page 281: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

5 or to Firmware and press to select.

6 or to Download and press to select.

The display shows the following:

Download Available Start Download

No DownloadAvailable

Download notavailable

7 Do one of the following:

•Select Yes and press to start thedownload.

•Select No and press to return to theprevious menu.

Frequency FileFrequency File Up to Date

Note: If the Frequency File is not Up to Date (and ifthe radio has partially collected a more recentfrequency file version) the radio displays a list with

additional options; Version, %Received, andDownload.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Frequency and press to select.

The display shows Freq. File is Up to Date.

Frequency File Pending – Version

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

Adv

ance

d Fe

atur

es in

Con

nect

Plu

s M

ode

280

English

Page 282: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

4 or to Updates and press to select.

5 or to Frequency and press to select.

6 or to Version and press to select.

If there is a pending Frequency File, the displayshows the pending Frequency File versionnumber.

Frequency File Pending – % Received

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Updates and press to select.

5 or to %Received and press to select.

The screen displays the percentage of frequencyfile packets collected so far.

Frequency File Pending – Download

If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTANetwork Frequency File Transfer with a partial file,the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if stillongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you wantthe unit to rejoin an ongoing Network Frequency Filetransfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, usethe Download option as described below.

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to Updates and press to select.

Advanced Features in C

onnect Plus M

ode

281

English

Page 283: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

5 or to Frequency and press to select.

6 or to Download and press to select.

Download CurrentlyUnavailable

Download notavailable

Download CurrentlyAvailable

Start Download

7 Do one of the following:

• Select Yes and press to start the download.• Select No and press to return to the previous

menu.

Checking the GPS Information

Displays the GPS information on your radio, such asvalues of:

• Latitude• Longitude• Altitude• Direction• Velocity

• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)• Satellites• Version

1 to access the menu.

2 or to Utilities and press to select.

3 or to Radio Info and press to

select.

4 or to GPS Info and press to select.

5 or to the required item and press to

select.The display shows the requested GPSinformation.

See Turning the Global Positioning System (GPS) Onor Off on page 159 for details on GPS.A

dvan

ced

Feat

ures

in C

onne

ct P

lus

Mod

e

282

English

Page 284: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Batteries and Chargers WarrantyThe Workmanship Warranty

The workmanship warranty guarantees againstdefects in workmanship under normal use andservice.

All MOTOTRBOBatteries

24 Months

IMPRES Chargers(Single-Unit and Multi-Unit, Non-Display)

24 Months

IMPRES Chargers (Multi-Unit with Display)

12 Months

The Capacity WarrantyThe capacity warranty guarantees 80% of the ratedcapacity for the warranty duration.

Nickel Metal-Hydride(NiMH) or Lithium-Ion (Li-lon) Batteries

12 Months

IMPRES Batteries, WhenUsed Exclusively withIMPRES Chargers

18 Months

Batteries and C

hargers Warranty

283

English

Page 285: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Limited WarrantyMOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS

I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FORHOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (“MOTOROLA”)warrants the MOTOROLA manufacturedCommunication Products listed below (“Product”)against defects in material and workmanship undernormal use and service for a period of time from thedate of purchase as scheduled below:

DP Series DigitalPortable Radios

24 Months

Product Accessories(Excluding Batteries andChargers)

12 Months

MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge eitherrepair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts),replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), orrefund the purchase price of the Product during thewarranty period provided it is returned in accordance

with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts orboards are warranted for the balance of the originalapplicable warranty period. All replaced parts ofProduct shall become the property of MOTOROLA.

This express limited warranty is extended byMOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser onlyand is not assignable or transferable to any otherparty. This is the complete warranty for the Productmanufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLAassumes no obligations or liability for additions ormodifications to this warranty unless made in writingand signed by an officer of MOTOROLA.

Unless made in a separate agreement betweenMOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser,MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation,maintenance or service of the Product.

MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way forany ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLAwhich is attached to or used in connection with theProduct, or for operation of the Product with anyancillary equipment, and all such equipment isexpressly excluded from this warranty. Because eachsystem which may use the Product is unique,MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or

Lim

ited

War

rant

y

284

English

Page 286: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

operation of the system as a whole under thiswarranty.

II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:This warranty sets forth the full extent ofMOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product.Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price,at MOTOROLA’s option, is the exclusive remedy.THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALLOTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITYAND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THISLIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALLMOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES INEXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THEPRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OFTIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS,LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHERINCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE ORINABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THEFULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BYLAW.

III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSIONOR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ONHOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SOTHE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAYNOT APPLY.

This warranty gives specific legal rights, and theremay be other rights which may vary from state tostate.

IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the dateof purchase and Product item serial number) in orderto receive warranty service and, also, deliver or sendthe Product item, transportation and insuranceprepaid, to an authorized warranty service location.Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLAthrough one of its authorized warranty servicelocations. If you first contact the company which soldyou the Product (e.g., dealer or communicationservice provider), it can facilitate your obtainingwarranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at1-800-927-2744 US/Canada.

Limited W

arranty

285

English

Page 287: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOTCOVER:

1 Defects or damage resulting from use of theProduct in other than its normal and customarymanner.

2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water,or neglect.

3 Defects or damage from improper testing,operation, maintenance, installation, alteration,modification, or adjustment.

4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless causeddirectly by defects in material workmanship.

5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Productmodifications, disassembles or repairs (including,without limitation, the addition to the Product ofnon-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) whichadversely affect performance of the Product orinterfere with MOTOROLA's normal warrantyinspection and testing of the Product to verify anywarranty claim.

6 Product which has had the serial number removedor made illegible.

7 Rechargeable batteries if:

• any of the seals on the battery enclosure ofcells are broken or show evidence oftampering.

• the damage or defect is caused by charging orusing the battery in equipment or service otherthan the Product for which it is specified.

8 Freight costs to the repair depot.9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized

alteration of the software/firmware in the Product,does not function in accordance withMOTOROLA’s published specifications or the FCCcertification labeling in effect for the Product at thetime the Product was initially distributed fromMOTOROLA.

10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Productsurfaces that does not affect the operation of theProduct.

11 Normal and customary wear and tear.

VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suitbrought against the end user purchaser to the extentthat it is based on a claim that the Product or partsinfringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA willpay those costs and damages finally awarded against

Lim

ited

War

rant

y

286

English

Page 288: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

the end user purchaser in any such suit which areattributable to any such claim, but such defense andpayments are conditioned on the following:

1 that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly inwriting by such purchaser of any notice of suchclaim,

2 that MOTOROLA will have sole control of thedefense of such suit and all negotiations for itssettlement or compromise, and

3 should the Product or parts become, or inMOTOROLA’s opinion be likely to become, thesubject of a claim of infringement of a UnitedStates patent, that such purchaser will permitMOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either toprocure for such purchaser the right to continueusing the Product or parts or to replace or modifythe same so that it becomes non-infringing or togrant such purchaser a credit for the Product orparts as depreciated and accept its return. Thedepreciation will be an equal amount per year overthe lifetime of the Product or parts as establishedby MOTOROLA.

MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to anyclaim of patent infringement which is based upon thecombination of the Product or parts furnished

hereunder with software, apparatus or devices notfurnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA haveany liability for the use of ancillary equipment orsoftware not furnished by MOTOROLA which isattached to or used in connection with the Product.The foregoing states the entire liability ofMOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patentsby the Product or any parts thereof.

Laws in the United States and other countriespreserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights forcopyrighted MOTOROLA software such as theexclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distributecopies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLAsoftware may be used in only the Product in whichthe software was originally embodied and suchsoftware in such Product may not be replaced,copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used toproduce any derivative thereof. No other useincluding, without limitation, alteration, modification,reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering ofsuch MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights insuch MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license isgranted by implication, estoppel or otherwise underMOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights.

Limited W

arranty

287

English

Page 289: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

VII. GOVERNING LAW:This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State ofIllinois, U.S.A.

Lim

ited

War

rant

y

288

English

Page 290: PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO™ … · Programmable Manual Dial Button.....192 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....193

Motorola Solutions, Inc.

*68012003064*68012003064-HA

MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license.All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. © 2012 – 2014 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.October 2014

www.motorolasolutions.com/mototrbo